JP2017018696A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine facilitating a proper handling with respect to an abnormal winning in a variable winning device.SOLUTION: If an abnormal winning error start specifying command, which is based on a detection of a game ball to a variable winning device while the variable winning device is being closed, is determined to be received from a main control part (S5000: Yes), a sub control part shifts the processing to S5002 and performs abnormal winning error processing. In the abnormal winning error processing, the sub control part counts an occurrence frequency of the abnormal winning errors, and changes a notification mode to the abnormal winning errors on each occasion depending on cases where the occurrence frequency is between at least one time and less than 10 times, between at least 10 times and less than 30 times, and at least 30 times.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 50

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a winning device capable of winning a game ball.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a winning device capable of winning a game ball is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and when a gaming ball wins a prize, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. It is like that.

  In such a variable winning device, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, a winning ball detecting means is provided for detecting that a game ball has been won, and the winning ball detecting means detects a winning of the game ball. In such a case, it is determined that the prize is abnormal and the fact is notified.

JP-A-5-228243

  However, in the conventional technique such as Patent Document 1, the abnormal winning notification mode of the variable winning device is uniform regardless of the abnormal winning situation. However, it was difficult to deal with it properly.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily cope with abnormal winning of a variable winning device.

  In order to solve such a problem, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a gaming area (game area 114) in which a gaming ball flows down and a predetermined gaming area as described in claim 1. When the condition is satisfied, a variable winning device (second starter 118, first big winning device 120, second big winning device 146) that can be converted from a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won to an open state that can be won, and the variable A gaming machine (game machine 100) provided with winning ball detecting means (second starting device switch 411, first big winning device switch 414, second big winning device switch 416) for detecting that a game ball has won the winning device. ) And a winning determination means (abnormal winning error processing in step S1700) for determining a closed state winning in which the game ball wins when the variable winning device when the gaming condition is not satisfied is in a closed state, and a predetermined period A number-of-times storing means (sub-RAM 453) for storing the number of times that the winning determination means has determined that the closed state winning has occurred, and the closed state winning based on the number of occurrences of the closed state winning stored by the number of times storing means. Notification means (main display device 108, voice output device 138, frame decoration lamp 141, game information output terminal plate 424), and the notification means is a voice notification means (speaker) that notifies by voice. (Sound output device) 138) and a light emission notification means (frame decoration lamp 141) for notification by light emission, wherein the sound notification means and the light emission notification means are provided for the number of occurrences of the closed state prize stored in the number storage means. The closed state winning is not performed if the number of occurrences of the closed state winning is less than a predetermined number, and the closed state is determined by the winning determination means during the notification. If the winning is determined to have occurred, and summarized in that to perform a further predetermined time broadcast from that point.

  Incidentally, the names and symbols in the parentheses are examples to show the correspondence with specific means described in the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the invention, and the present invention includes the names and symbols in the parentheses. However, the present invention is not limited to the specific means shown in FIG.

  According to the present invention, it becomes easy to appropriately cope with abnormal winning of the variable winning device.

It is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine 100 showing a state in which a glass frame 150 and an inner frame 170 according to the present embodiment are opened. It is an enlarged view of the 2nd big prize device 146 concerning this embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the indicator 104 concerning this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control apparatus provided in the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the volume switch 465 according to the present embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening / closing timing of the 1st big winning device 120, the 2nd big winning device 146, and the probability variation decision area | region (V area | region) 204 which concern on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the set of 5 times of big hits which concern on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the main process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the timer interruption process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the starter switch process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the special symbol process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the big hit determination process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the special symbol variation time selected by the variation pattern selection process which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the process during a stop performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the big prize apparatus process (step S1400-S1450) performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the big prize apparatus process (step S1500-S1508) performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game state setting process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the abnormality process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the abnormal winning error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the generation | occurrence | production conditions of the abnormal winning error which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the dish full tank error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the door opening error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the payout state error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the generation | occurrence | production conditions of the payout state error which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the switch abnormality error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the generation | occurrence | production condition of the switch abnormal error which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the magnet detection error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the discharge | emission error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the electromagnetic wave detection error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the discharge ball check error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the solenoid photosensor abnormality error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the impact detection error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the abnormal V winning error process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the main process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the process which concerns on the alerting | reporting apparatus etc. at the time of power activation concerning this embodiment, and a power recovery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the RAM clear preparation screen which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the process which concerns on the input button etc. at the time of the power activation which concerns on this embodiment, and a power recovery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the process which concerns on the gimmick etc. at the time of the power activation which concerns on this embodiment, and a power recovery. It is a time chart which shows an example of the operation of gimmick at the time of power activation concerning this embodiment, and power restoration. It is a time chart which shows an example of the operation | movement sequence of 1 set of gimmicks at the time of power activation concerning this embodiment, and at the time of power recovery. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the timer interruption process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the volume switching monitoring process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen display of the software volume adjustable period for every gaming state which concerns on this embodiment, and a volume value. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the gimmick monitoring process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game related command reception process (step S4400-S4430) performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game related command reception process (step S4500-S4508) performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the demonstration designation | designated command reception process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the production history storage process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the change log | history memory process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the probability change confirmation area | region passage effect process performed by sub CPU451 of the effect control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the abnormality related command reception process (step S5000-S5042) performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the abnormality related command reception process (step S5100-S5122) performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the abnormal winning error process in case the frequency | count of occurrence of the abnormal winning error performed by sub CPU451 of the production | presentation control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment is 1 time or more and less than 10 times. It is a time chart which shows the content of the abnormal winning error process in case the frequency | count of occurrence of the abnormal winning error performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment is 10 times or more and less than 30 times. It is a time chart which shows the content of the abnormal winning error process in case the frequency | count of occurrence of the abnormal winning error performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment is 30 times or more. It is a time chart which shows the content of the dish full tank error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the door opening error process in case an error is complete | finished in less than 5 minutes after the error start performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the door opening error process when 5 minutes or more pass from the error start performed by sub CPU451 of the production | presentation control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment, and an error is complete | finished. It is a time chart which shows the content of the payout state error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the switch abnormality error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the magnet detection error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the discharge | emission error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the electric wave detection error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the discharge ball confirmation error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the solenoid photosensor abnormality error performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the impact detection error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the abnormal V winning error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning frequency abnormality error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the error determination process of the winning frequency abnormal error which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the content of the winning frequency abnormality error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the abnormality related command reception process which concerns on the modification of the winning frequency abnormality error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the modification of the winning frequency abnormality error process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the liquid crystal alerting | reporting at the time of the error alerting | reporting which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which a frame decoration lamp 141 is lit at the time of error lamp notification according to the present embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the priority of the audio | voice alerting | reporting at the time of the error alerting | reporting which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the error alerting time for every error classification which concerns on this embodiment, and the presence or absence of an external information terminal output. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the input device process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the top menu screen which concerns on this embodiment. It is a system configuration diagram of the gaming machine 100 and the information management device 7850 via the Internet 7810 according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram of the information management apparatus 7850 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processes of this game system which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the login process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the logout process performed by sub CPU451 of the production control part 450 which concerns on this embodiment.

<Configuration of gaming machine>
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1-1 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 1-2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160. FIG. The gaming machine 100 fires a game ball based on a player's launch operation, and when a game ball wins a specific winning device, a pachinko game in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the win. Machine.

  The gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 160 attached to an island facility of a game store, an inner frame 170 rotatably supported by the outer frame 160 on the front side of the outer frame 160, and a front side of the inner frame 170. The inner frame 170 and the glass frame 150 rotatably supported are provided. A glass frame opening switch 483a for detecting that the glass frame 150 has been opened is provided at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150, and for detecting that the inner frame 170 has been opened at a predetermined position of the inner frame 170. The inner frame opening switch 483b is provided (see FIG. 4A).

  As shown in FIG. 1-2, the inner frame 170 is provided with main mechanisms and components constituting the gaming machine 100, various boards described later, and the like, and a game area 114 in which game balls flow down is formed. A game board 102 is detachably provided. In the game board 102, a game ball launched from below (see the launching device 434, see FIG. 4-1) rises along the surface of the game board 102 and forms a passage toward the upper position of the game area 114 (not shown). A rail member and a guide member (not shown) for guiding the raised game ball to the right side of the game area 114 are provided.

In addition, a board lamp 110 is provided on the upper part of the game board 102 to produce an effect by emitting light according to the progress of the game. Further, a main display device 108 for displaying images for various effects is disposed at a position that is easily visible by the player in the approximate center of the game board 102. The main display device 108 is a display device for displaying various images in accordance with the progress of the game by the player. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used. Examples of the contents displayed on the main display device 108 include the following (A) to (D). (A) The effect image of the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery), its process, and the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) for notifying the player of the result.
(A) Characters and items that appear to display a notice effect or the like.
(C) A hold image indicating the number of times the special symbol lottery is put on hold.
(D) Explanations relating to the contents of the game and explanations related to various images and characters appearing in the effect design.
(E) Normal symbol lottery (winning lottery) effect image, its process, and fluctuation display of the effect symbol (ordinary symbol) for notifying the player of the result.

  Here, the “explanation related to the contents of the game and the explanation related to various images and characters appearing in the effect design” shown in (d) above is, for example, “big hit” when the big hit result is notified, It may be an explanation of the meaning of a term relating to a game such as “temporary time”, or a special term characterizing the profile of the character appearing in the production symbol or the character (for example, a member preferred by the player among members of the singer group “ For example, the term “push men”) is displayed, and these are displayed to satisfy the player's preference.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a sub display device 107 is provided at a substantially upper center portion of the main display device 108. The sub display device 107 is related to an image displayed on the main display device 108. Thus, an auxiliary image of the display image of the main display device 108 is effect-displayed. The sub display device 107 is not limited to the position shown in the figure, and may be arranged anywhere near the main display device 108. For example, the sub display device 107 may be configured to be movable in front of the screen of the main display device 108. Good. In this embodiment, the main display device 108 and the sub display device 107 are used as a liquid crystal display device. However, a plasma display or an organic EL display may be used, a projector, a so-called 7-segment LED, or a dot matrix. Alternatively, a display device such as a rotating drum may be used.

  Further, an identification display 106 including a first identification display 106 a and a second identification display 106 b is provided at the lower left of the main display device 108. The identification indicator 106 is composed of LEDs, and as shown in FIG. 1-1, is provided in a star shape in parallel in the vertical direction so as to display identification symbols. The upper first identification indicator 106a is synchronized with the change display of the special symbols on the first and second special symbol indicators 104a and 104b described later, and the lower second identification indicator 106b is displayed on the normal symbol display described later. In synchronism with the normal symbol variation display on the device 104e, each identification symbol is varied and displayed (flashes) in a predetermined color.

  That is, the identification symbol displayed by the first identification indicator 106a is also referred to as a fourth symbol, and the effect symbol (for example, three first symbols, second symbol, and third symbol) displayed on the main display device 108. However, even if the variable display of the special symbols on the first and second special symbol display devices 104a and 104b cannot be displayed in a variable manner (for example, reach effect, etc.), the special symbol (effect symbol) is changed for the player. It is possible to notify that the vehicle is stopped or stopped.

  The identification symbol displayed by the second identification indicator 106b is also referred to as the fourth symbol, and the effect symbol displayed on the main display device 108 is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol on the normal symbol display 104e. Even when the display cannot be changed (for example, reach effect, etc.), the player can be notified that the normal symbol (effect symbol) is changing or stopped.

  Therefore, the player can always recognize that the special symbol is changing or stopped by confirming the identification symbol of the first identification indicator 106a, and confirm the identification symbol of the second identification indicator 106b. By doing so, it is possible to always recognize that the normal symbol is changing or stopped. Further, in the vicinity of the identification indicator 106, a hold indicator composed of LEDs for displaying the number of hold times of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery may be further provided.

  As will be described later, the first and second special symbol displays 104a and 104b and the normal symbol display 104e are provided outside the game area 114 and are controlled on the main board side as main control means. On the other hand, the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol indicators) 106a and 106b are indicators provided in the game area 114 and controlled on the sub-board side as sub-control means (FIG. 4). -1).

  Also, on the back of the game board 102, there is provided a board gimmick 109 composed of an upper gimmick 109a, a lower gimmick 109b, a left gimmick 109c, and a right gimmick 109d as movable accessories used for various effects. The board gimmick 109 is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 102 by a board gimmick driving unit 491 (see FIG. 4A), and various effects are produced by moving the board gimmick according to the progress of the game by the player. I do. The board surface gimmick 109 is initially disposed on the back surface of the game board 102 and is configured to be movable to the front surface of the screen of the main display device 108 by a predetermined operation (such as a combination of gimmicks).

  Further, on the back of the game board 102, a magnetic sensor 426 (see FIG. 4-1) for detecting fraud by a magnet that causes a game ball to be won by a winning device targeted using a magnet, and radio waves are generated. Radio wave sensor 427 (see FIG. 4A) for detecting fraud due to radio waves that erroneously activates a detection switch for detecting a winning ball of the winning device aimed at, and a probability change confirmation of a second grand prize winning device 146 described later. A predetermined number of impact sensors 428 are provided for detecting fraud due to an impact that shakes the gaming machine 100 and gives an impact in order to win a game ball in the area 204. Note that the magnetic sensor 426 is attached to a position that does not malfunction even when a device that generates magnetism such as an electric solenoid or a motor provided in the gaming machine 100 is driven.

  A game area 114 in the game board 102 is provided with a game nail, a windmill, etc. (not shown) that change the falling direction of the game ball, and a first starter 116, a second starter 118, a normal symbol operation gate. 112, a first grand prize device 120, a second grand prize device 146, and a normal prize device 122 are arranged. Further, the game area 114 is provided with a discharge port 124 through which game balls that have not been won in any winning device among the game balls launched into the game area 114 are discharged out of the game area 114.

  Each of the first starter 116 and the second starter 118 wins when a game ball enters, and a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is started. Here, “special symbol lottery” means that when a game ball enters the first and second starting devices 116 and 118, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. A process for determining whether or not a big hit is made by comparing with a value corresponding to “big hit”. This jackpot lottery result is not immediately notified to the player, but the first and second special symbol displays 104a and 104b described later display the variation of the special symbol, and when a predetermined variation time has passed, The special symbol corresponding to the big win lottery result is fixedly displayed after the stop and the lottery result is notified to the player. In addition, the main display device 108 performs a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display on the first and second special symbol indicators 104a and 104b. The player is effectively notified of the jackpot lottery result.

  In other words, the first starter 116 is a special electric accessory (first large winning device 120, second large winning device 146) or a predetermined special symbol display (first special symbol display 104a). The second starting device 118 is a special electric instrument or a predetermined special symbol display (second special symbol display 104b). Is a winning device related to winning a game ball.

  The normal symbol operation gate 112 starts the normal symbol lottery (winning lottery) when the game ball passes. Here, “ordinary symbol lottery” means that when a game ball passes through the normal symbol operating gate 112, a random number for determining a normal symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number corresponds to a predetermined “winning”. This is a process for determining whether or not the game is successful by comparing with a value. The lottery result of the normal symbol does not immediately notify the lottery result after the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 112, and the normal symbol display 104e (to be described later) displays a fluctuation display such as blinking of the normal symbol. When the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol lottery result is fixedly displayed (lit or extinguished) after the stop, and the lottery result is notified to the player.

  In addition, the main display device 108 performs a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the normal symbol variation display of the normal symbol operation gate 112, and the symbol matching game can more effectively win the winning lottery result. Is notified to the player. In addition, the symbol matching game related to the normal symbol is displayed with a simple production symbol (for example, “○” indicating winning, “x” indicating loss), and compared to the symbol matching game related to the special symbol, A small size is displayed at the corner of the screen of the main display device 108.

  In other words, the normal symbol operating gate 112 operates a predetermined normal electric accessory (electric tulip 126 described later) or a predetermined normal symbol display 104e described later, which passes the game ball. Device.

  The second starter 118 is provided on the right side of the first starter 116 and includes an electric tulip 126 in the vicinity of the entrance of the game ball as an example of an ordinary electric accessory. The electric tulip 126 has a pair of wings imitating, for example, tulip flowers, and the pair of wings open and close left and right by driving an electric tulip opening / closing unit 412 (for example, an electric solenoid) described later.

  When the pair of blade portions of the electric tulip 126 are closed (see FIG. 1-1), the opening width guided to the entrance of the second starter 118 is extremely narrow, so that the game ball enters the second starter 118. No closed state. On the other hand, when the pair of wings open to the left and right (not shown), the opening width guided to the entrance of the second starting device 118 increases, so that the game ball enters the second starting device 118 easily. .

  Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operating gate 112 and wins the normal symbol lottery, the pair of blades opens for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds or 1.80 seconds), and the electric tulip 126 is specified times. It opens and closes (for example, once or three times) (however, the driving is stopped when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, max 6) is reached).

  Note that the second starting device 118 is difficult to enter the game ball when the player is making a left-hand hit even when the electric tulip 126 is open, but when the player is making a right-hand hit, Easy to enter. Conversely, the first starting device 116 is easy to enter the game ball when the player is making a left-hand hit, and is difficult to enter when the player is making a right-hand shot.

  The normal winning device 122 is provided on the left side of the first starting device 116 and is a winning device related to winning a game ball, in which a lottery is not started even if a game ball wins. The normal winning device 122 is provided with a normal winning device switch 422 for detecting a winning game ball (see FIG. 4A).

  The first grand prize winning device 120 is located below the second starting device 118 and opens according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The first grand prize winning device 120 is normally in a closed state (see FIG. 1-1) in which no game ball can enter, but depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, the game board 102 surface opens and closes the door. Will protrude and become open (not shown), making it easier for game balls to enter. For example, in a big hit game, a round that is in an open state is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 7 times) until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds elapse or max 9 winnings) is satisfied.

  The second grand prize winning device 146 is located above the second starting device 118 in the right area of the game area 114, and is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The second grand prize-winning device 146 is normally in a closed state, as shown by a solid line, in which a honey-shaped opening and closing member (hereinafter also referred to as right honey, see FIG. 2) 200 does not enter a game ball. However, according to the result of the special symbol lottery, the right honey 200 is opened as shown by the dotted line, and the game ball is easy to enter.

  For example, the second grand prize winning device 146 performs a predetermined number of rounds in an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, a condition of 29.5 seconds or 0.1 seconds or a maximum of 9 winnings) is satisfied in the big hit game. For example, once).

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the second grand prize winning device 146. As shown in FIG. 2, there is a space inside the second grand prize-winning device 146 for the game balls that have entered the second grand prize-winning device 146 to flow down. In this space, there are a downflow path on the left side and a downflow path on the right side. Is provided. This right flow path is provided with a probability variation confirmation area (area where “V” in FIG. 2 is described, hereinafter also referred to as V area) 204, and at the branch portion between the left flow path and the right flow path. A probability change fixed region opening / closing member (hereinafter also referred to as V-shaped) 202 is provided.

  The V honey 202 is normally in a closed state in which the right flow path (V region 204) is closed as indicated by a solid line, and the game ball flows in only the left flow path. Then, after the second grand prize winning device 146 is opened, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 3 seconds), as shown by the dotted line, the right flow path is opened and the left flow path is closed, and the V region 204 is opened. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 6 seconds), the closed state is restored.

  In other words, when the V honey 202 is in the closed state, the game ball that has entered the second grand prize winning device 146 flows down the flow path on the left side and does not pass through the V region 204, and when the V honey 202 is in the open state, the second The game balls that have entered the grand prize winning device 146 flow down the right flow path and pass through the V region 204. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize winning device 146 are detected by entering the second region 206 after flowing down the left flow path or the right flow path, and then discharged from the second big prize winning device 146. The

  As will be described later, the second grand prize device 146 is provided in the vicinity of the right honey 200, and a second grand prize device switch 416 for detecting a game ball that has entered the second major prize device 146, is discharged. Provided in the area 206, provided in the second grand prize-winning device discharge switch 418 for detecting a game ball discharged from the second grand prize-winning device 146 (winned in the second grand prize-winning device 146), the V area 204, Probability change confirmation region (V region) switch 419 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the V region 204, for detecting a state in which the game ball can pass through the V region 204 (the open state of the V honey 202) A probability variation fixed region (V region) photosensor 420 is provided (see FIG. 4A).

  Next, payout of prize balls will be described. When a game ball enters (wins) the first starter 116, the second starter 118, the first grand prize device 120, the second big prize device 146, and the normal prize device 122, depending on the place where the game ball has won. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out per game ball.

  For example, if one game ball is won in the first starter 116 and the second starter 118, three prize balls are won, and if one game ball is won in the first big prize device 120 or the second big prize device 146, 13 are given. When one game ball wins the prize ball and the normal winning device 122, ten prize balls are paid out. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol operating gate 112, no prize ball is paid out.

  Next, the display 104 provided in the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display device 104. On the lower right side of the game board 102, a display 104 for displaying the result of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery described above, the number of holds, and the like is arranged. As shown in FIG. 3, the display 104 includes a first special symbol display 104a, a second special symbol display 104b, a first special symbol hold display 104c, a second special symbol hold display 104d, and a normal symbol display. 104e and a normal symbol hold display 104f, which are arranged outside the game area 114.

  The first special symbol display 104a displays a display symbol corresponding to the winning of a game ball on the first starting device 116, and is composed of a 7-segment display device. When winning, the special symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, then stopped and displayed, and the lottery result is confirmed and displayed.

  The second special symbol display 104b displays a display symbol corresponding to the winning of a game ball on the second starting device 118, and, like the first special symbol display 104a, is a 7-segment display device. When the game ball is won in the second starting device 118, the special symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and then stopped and displayed to confirm the lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 104e displays a display symbol in response to the game ball passing through the normal symbol operation gate 112, and is composed of two LED lamps. The game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 112. In such a case, the normal symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed to confirm the lottery result.

  The number of times the first special symbol hold indicator 104c holds the special symbol lottery when the game ball wins the first starting device 116 (after the first special symbol display 104a variably displays the first special symbol) It may be said that it is the number of times the processing to stop display is suspended.

  The second special symbol hold indicator 104d is the number of times the special symbol lottery is held when the game ball is won in the second starter 118 (after the second special symbol display by the second special symbol indicator 104b is variably displayed. It may be said that it is the number of times the processing to stop display is suspended.

  The normal symbol hold display device 104f displays the number of times that the normal symbol lottery is held (it may be said that the number of times the normal symbol display by the normal symbol display device 104e is suspended and the process of stopping display is suspended). .

  The first special symbol hold indicator 104c, the second special symbol hold indicator 104d, and the normal symbol hold indicator 104f are each composed of LED display devices arranged in a line, and the number of times of hold is displayed according to the lighting mode.

  Next, the apparatus provided in the glass frame 150 will be described. A glass frame 150 that is the front surface of the gaming machine 100 includes an upper plate 128, a lower plate 129, a handle 130, a speaker 138, an upper frame lamp 140, a frame decoration lamp 141, an effect button 142, and an effect key 144 (hereinafter referred to as an effect button 142). The production key 144 is also referred to as an input device 145) (see FIG. 1).

  When the player performs an operation of rotating the dial 132 of the handle 130 in a clockwise direction, a later-described launching device 434 (100, which will be described later) at a predetermined time interval (for example, 100 per minute) with a hitting force corresponding to the operation angle. 4-1) is driven to fire a game ball. In the figure, 134 is a stop button. When the player presses the stop button 134, the driving of the launching device 434 can be stopped even when the dial 132 is being rotated, and the launch of the game ball can be stopped. it can. In addition, the handle 130 includes an effect handle device 492 for executing a jackpot finalizing notice effect (a vibrator motor 493 for executing air vibration as a frame gimmick, an air sending fan 494, a flash for executing P-FLASH). LED495) is provided (refer FIG. 4-1).

  The speaker 138, the on-frame lamp 140, and the frame decoration lamp 141 each notify the gaming state and situation of the gaming machine 100 and perform various effects. The speaker 138 performs various effects using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame upper lamp 140 and the frame decoration lamp 141 are configured by LEDs, and perform various effects by light depending on a pattern by lighting / flashing or a difference in emission color.

  Here, the frame decoration lamp 141 is provided on the glass frame 150 so as to surround the game area 114, and a pair of retractable 137 is provided on both upper sides thereof. When the retractable 137 is in a predetermined gaming state, as shown by arrows A and B in FIGS. 1 and 1-2, the retractable 137 projects as a frame gimmick at a predetermined angle so as to protrude forward by a retractable motor 481 described later. It rotates and opens and closes. Furthermore, a retractable lamp 139 made of LEDs is built in the retractable 137, and the retractable lamp 139 rotates as a frame gimmick by a patrol motor 482, which will be described later, while lighting for a predetermined time when the retractable 137 is opened. It is supposed to be.

  The upper plate 128 is a ball storage plate that stores game balls to be sent to the launching device 434 in order to launch game balls to the game area 114, and the upper plate 128 is configured to change an effect mode by a pressing operation. There are provided an effect button 142 and an effect key 144 as the input device 145, and a ball removal button 135 for causing a game ball stored in the upper plate 128 to flow down to the lower plate 129 by a pressing operation.

  The effect button 142 and the effect key 144 are provided for the player to input an effect, respectively. The production button 142 is provided on the upper front portion of the upper plate 128 protruding forward of the gaming machine 100. The effect key 144 has a center key and four direction keys arranged in a substantially cross shape, and is provided on the upper front portion of the plate 128 adjacent to the effect button 142.

  The effect button 142 and the effect key 144 are each pressed by the player to perform a predetermined effect. For example, the player can enjoy a predetermined effect by pressing the effect button 142 at a predetermined timing. Further, the player can select one of a plurality of images displayed on the main display device 108 by operating the four direction keys. Further, the player can input the selected image as information by operating the center key.

  Here, the effect button 142 is also referred to as a “chance button”, and when it enters a predetermined gaming state, as shown by an arrow C in FIG. 1, it is projected upward by the chance button motor 474 as a frame gimmick. The chance button lamp 475 composed of four LEDs that are raised or built in is lit in a predetermined color. Further, the chance button 142 is provided with a surrounding lamp 143 that constitutes a part of the frame decoration lamp 141 with a full color LED so as to surround the circumference of the chance button 142, and this surrounding lamp 143 is also in a predetermined gaming state. In addition, like the chance button lamp 475, it is lit in a predetermined color (see FIG. 4-1).

  The lower plate 129 is a ball storage plate that is disposed below the upper plate 128 and stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 128. The lower plate 129 stores the game balls stored in the lower plate 129 by pressing operation. A ball extraction button 136 for discharging is provided. By operating the ball removal button 136, the player drops the game ball that cannot be stored because the lower plate 129 is full due to a big hit, etc., and discharges it to a ball box (not shown). It becomes possible to do. The ball removal button 136 may be a sliding lever or the like. Further, as will be described later, it will be described later for detecting that the lower plate 129 is filled with a game ball at a predetermined position of the lower plate 129 (such as a ball passage communicating the upper plate 128 and the lower plate 129). A dish full tank switch 423 is provided (see FIG. 4A).

  Further, on the back side of the glass frame 150, a payout device (not shown) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls for winning is provided. The payout device pays out from a payout drive unit (payout motor) 444 for paying out game balls, a ball-free switch 445 for detecting that game balls to be paid out are lost (deficient), and a payout device. A payout ball counting switch 446 that counts the played game balls is integrally provided in the counter case (see FIG. 4A).

  Further, in the lower part of the rear side of the glass frame 150, each winning device, that is, the first starting device 116, the second starting device 118, the first big winning device 120, the second big winning device 146, and the normal winning device 122 are won. A frame count switch 429 for counting the played game balls (safe balls) is provided (see FIG. 4A). In other words, all the game balls won in each winning device pass through the frame count switch 429, and this frame count switch 429 has an error in the winning switch that detects the winning of the winning device due to fraud by radio waves, for example. In such a case, the abnormality is detected by comparing the number of game balls passed detected by the winning switch and the number of game balls passed detected by the frame count switch 429.

  Furthermore, on the back side of the glass frame 150, various devices and substrates are attached in addition to the dispensing device. For example, on the rear surface of the game board 102, a main board and a sub board (not shown) are arranged. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4A to be described later, the main board is configured with a main control unit 400 as main control means for mainly controlling basic operations of the game such as internal lottery and determination of winning. A main board is disposed.

  The sub-board has a launch control board configured with a launch control unit 430 that controls a launch device 434 that launches a game ball onto the upper portion of the game area 114, and a payout configured with a payout control unit 440 that controls the payout of prize balls. Control board, production control board configured with production control section 450 that controls production overall, image control board constructed with image sound control section 460 that controls production using images and sounds, and various lamps (on-frame lamps) 140, a frame decoration lamp 141, a panel lamp 110), a frame gimmick (production handle device 492, retractable 137, patrol lamp 139, chance button 142), and a lamp control unit 470 for controlling the production by the board surface gimmick 109 are configured. A lamp control board and the like are provided. That is, these sub-boards mainly function as sub-control means that operate (game control) in response to a command (command) from the main control means (main control unit 400).

  In addition, on the rear surface of the gaming board 102, the power of the gaming machine 100 is switched on / off, and 24V (volts) of AC power supplied to the gaming machine 100 is converted into DC power of various voltages. A switching power supply (not shown) that outputs the direct current power to the various substrates described above is provided.

<Configuration of control device of gaming machine 100>
A control device that performs operation control and signal processing in the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a control device provided in the gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. 4A, the control device of the gaming machine 100 includes a main control unit 400, a launch control unit 430, a payout control unit 440, an effect control unit 450, an image sound control unit 460, a lamp control unit 470, and the like. ing.

  The main control unit 400 is a main control means for controlling the basic operation of the game, and includes a one-chip microcomputer 404 including a main CPU 401, a main ROM 402 and a main RAM 403, a RAM (RWM) clear switch 405, and a main board. At least an input port and an output port (not shown) are provided, and connected to a power supply unit including a payout control unit 440, an effect control unit 450, and a switching power supply (not shown). The main control unit 400 is connected to the payout control unit 440 by two-way communication, and the effect control unit 450 is connected to the effect control unit 450 from the main control unit 400 by one-way communication.

  On the input side of the main control unit 400, a first starter switch 410 that detects that a game ball has entered the first starter 116, and a first that detects that a game ball has entered the second starter 118. 2 Starter switch 411, normal symbol operation gate switch 413 for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal symbol operation gate 113, and first grand prize for detecting that a game ball has entered the first grand prize device 120 The device switch 414 and the second grand prize device 146 that detects that a game ball has entered the second grand prize device 146 are discharged from the second grand prize device 146 (has won the second grand prize device 146). Probability change confirmation region (V region) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second large winning device discharge switch 418 for detecting the game ball and the probability change confirmation region (V region) 204 in the second big winning device 146. Switch 419 and probability change confirmation for detecting a state in which a game ball can pass through probability change confirmation region (V region) 204 in second grand prize winning device 146 (open state of probability change confirmation region opening / closing member (V-hatch) 202). Region (V region) photo sensor 420, normal winning device switch 422 for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal winning device 122, and dish full tank switch for detecting that the lower plate 129 is full of game balls 423, a magnetic sensor 426 that detects fraud by magnets, a radio sensor 427 that detects fraud by radio waves, an impact sensor 428 that detects fraud by shocks, a first starter 116, a second starter 118, and a first grand prize device 120 A frame count switch 429 for counting the game balls (safe balls) won in the second grand prize device 146 and the normal prize device 122 is connected, Various signals such as known signals are inputted to the main control unit 400.

  The various input switches described above are connected to the input side of the main control unit 400 via an input interface IC (not shown). This interface IC is provided with an abnormality detection processing circuit for detecting an abnormality such as disconnection (not connected) or short circuit of the input switch. When such an abnormality occurs in the input switch, a switch abnormality detection signal is detected. Is output to the main control unit 400.

  On the output side of the main control unit 400, an electric tulip opening / closing part (electric solenoid) 412 that opens and closes a pair of blades of the electric tulip 126 of the second starting device 118, and an opening / closing operation of the first grand prize winning device 120 are opened / closed. A first grand prize-winning device opening / closing part (electric solenoid) 415, a second grand prize-winning device opening / closing part (electric solenoid) 417 for opening / closing the opening / closing member (right honey) 200 of the second big prize-winning device 146, and a second grand prize-winning device. 146, a probability variation confirmation region opening / closing part (electric solenoid) 421 for opening / closing the probability variation confirmation region opening / closing member (V-shaped) 202 in 146, an external device for outputting predetermined game information (eg, abnormality information) to an external device such as an external hall computer The game ball is inserted into the game information output terminal board (external information terminal) 424 as the output means (notification means) and the first starter 116. Accordingly, the first special symbol display 104a for displaying the first special symbol, the second special symbol display 104b for displaying the second special symbol based on the game ball entering the second starting device 118, the first A game ball has passed the first special symbol hold indicator 104c for displaying the number of reserved balls for the special symbol, the second special symbol hold indicator 104d for displaying the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol, and the normal symbol operating gate 112. The normal symbol display 104e for displaying the normal symbol based on the above and the normal symbol holding indicator 104f for displaying the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol are connected to output various signals.

  The main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400 reads out a program stored in the main ROM 402 based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device and display, or Data and commands are transmitted to other control units according to the result of the arithmetic processing.

  The main ROM 402 of the main control unit 400 stores a game control program and data and tables necessary for determining various games. For example, the main ROM 402 stores a jackpot determination table that is referred to in the jackpot lottery, a symbol determination table that determines a stop symbol of a special symbol, a variation pattern determination table that determines a variation pattern of a special symbol, and the like.

  The main RAM 403 of the main control unit 400 functions as a data work area when the main CPU 401 performs arithmetic processing, and has a plurality of storage areas. For example, in the main RAM 403, a normal / special symbol holding storage area, a normal / special symbol data storage area, a normal / special symbol random value storage area, a round number storage area, a gate / various winning device data storage area, a game state storage area , Detection switch state storage area, abnormality related information storage area, gaming state buffer, normal / special stop symbol data storage area, production transmission data storage area, management equipment transmission data storage area, hall facility transmission data storage area, various Timers and counters are provided.

  Further, the main RAM 403 constitutes a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means whose whole or a part is backed up by a backup power source described later. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine 100 is stopped, all or a part of the data stored in the main RAM 403 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The content is retained.

  Furthermore, the main control unit 400 is directly mounted with a RAM clear switch 405 for instructing to erase the contents of data stored in the main RAM 403 on the main board on which the main control unit 400 is configured. When the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on in a predetermined manner when the gaming machine 100 is turned on (eg, turned on at the same time as turning on the gaming machine 100 and then turned on again), the RAM clear signal is sent to the main control unit 400. The data stored in the main RAM 403 is erased. Note that the main control unit 400 may be provided with a RAM clear restriction button for preventing a game history from being erased by a third party in such a manner that only a person concerned can operate.

  The power supply unit is provided with a backup power source composed of a capacitor, and supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 100 and monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 100. When the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, A disconnection detection signal is output to the main control unit 400. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal changes from the high level to the low level, the main control unit 400 detects the occurrence of the power interruption state, and thereby the main CPU 401 executes the process when the power supply is stopped. Note that the backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery or a combination of a capacitor and a battery. In addition to the main control unit 400, the power supply unit is connected to the launch control unit 430, the payout control unit 440, and the effect control unit 450.

  An effect control unit 450 as sub-control means mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. The effect control unit 450 includes a sub CPU 451, a sub ROM 452, and a sub RAM 453. As shown in FIG. 4A, the main control unit 400 is connected to the effect control unit 450 with respect to the main control unit 400. It is connected so that it can communicate in the direction.

  The effect control unit 450 is equipped with an RTC (real time clock) 454 that outputs the current time. The sub CPU 451 inputs a date signal indicating the current date or a time signal indicating the current time from the RTC 454, and executes various processes based on the current date and time. The RTC 454 is normally operated by the power supply from the gaming machine 100 when power is supplied to the gaming machine 100, and is supplied from the backup power source mounted on the power supply unit when the power of the gaming machine 100 is turned off. Operates with power supply. Therefore, the RTC 454 can measure the current date and time even when the gaming machine 100 is powered off. The RTC 454 may be operated by providing a battery on the effect control board.

  In addition, the effect control unit 450 is equipped with a volume switch 465 that adjusts the volume output from the speaker 138. In other words, the volume switch 465 functions as a hardware volume switch mounted directly on the sub-board in which the effect control unit 450 is configured, as shown in FIG. The volume switch 465 has a knob 466, and the volume is adjusted by sliding the knob 466 to the left and right in stages.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the volume can be set to be variable in three stages of “1”, “2”, and “3” from the left, with “1” being small and “2” being medium. , “3” is set to a large volume value. FIG. 4B is an enlarged view of the volume switch 465.

  Further, the volume changeover switch 465 functions as an eco mode switch for setting the gaming machine 100 to the eco mode by setting the knob 466 to “D” at the left end. When the gaming machine 100 is set to the eco mode, a lamp display such as a board surface or a frame LED, that is, a sub-side effect control unit 450 (lamp control unit 470) described later (see FIG. 4A). , The panel lamp 110, the frame lamp 140, the frame decoration lamp 141, the surrounding lamp 143, the chance button lamp 475, the patrol lamp 139, and the flash LED 495 have an illuminance of 85%, that is, a liquid crystal display device controlled by the image sound control unit 460, The backlight brightness of the sub display device 107 and the main display device 108 during waiting for customers (excluding the pachinko log screen), which will be described later, is changed to 50%.

  However, even if the gaming machine 100 is set to the eco mode, the first special symbol display 104a, the second special symbol display 104b, the first special symbol hold indicator 104c, and the second special symbol hold indicator 104d, the normal symbol display 104e, and the normal symbol hold indicator 104f, that is, the lamp indicator related to the special symbol and the lamp indicator related to the normal symbol (see FIG. 4-1) controlled by the main control unit 400 described later (main) The illuminance of all lamp displays controlled by the side is not lowered to 85%, but is maintained at 100% as it is.

  That is, when the gaming machine 100 is set to the eco mode by the volume switch 465 as the brightness / illuminance setting means (when the high brightness / illuminance is set to low brightness / illuminance), the lamp display controlled by the main side Maintains the high illuminance as it is, and the liquid crystal display / lamp display controlled by the sub side is changed to the low luminance / illuminance. That is, the display-related device controlled by the main side has higher luminance / illuminance than the display-related device controlled by the sub side (the display-related device controlled by the sub side has lower luminance / illuminance than the display-related device controlled by the main side. Become).

  Here, when the gaming machine 100 is set to the eco mode, even if the lamp display is controlled by the sub-side, the first identification display 106a and the second identification display 106b, that is, the lamp display according to the fourth symbol. The illuminance of the sub-display device 107 and the main display device 108 other than those waiting for the customer is not reduced to 85% but is maintained at 100%. However, it does not decrease to 50% and is maintained at 100% as it is.

  The reason for this is that the lamp indicator for special symbols, normal symbols and fourth symbols, special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) and normal symbol lottery (win lottery) process, results (including changes in symbols and during suspension) This is a lamp indicator that is extremely important to the player, and if these lamp indicators become difficult to see due to reduced illuminance, it will be difficult to determine the big hit or the hit, which is disadvantageous for the player. Because there is a risk of becoming.

  Similarly, effect images typified by variable display of effect symbols executed in the sub display device 107 and the main display device 108 other than waiting for customers related to special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) and normal symbol lottery (win lottery) Is a very important display device for the player that informs the player about the process and results of the special symbol lottery (big win lottery) and the normal symbol lottery (win lottery). This is because if it becomes difficult to see due to a decrease in the brightness of the light, it is difficult to determine the big hit or the hit, which may be disadvantageous for the player. Note that the pachinko log screen, which will be described later while waiting for a customer, is a screen on which the player browses personal data related to the gaming machine 100 such as his / her game history (e.g., completed missions). Since the screen displaying the data related to the player has a high degree of interest of the player, the luminance is not reduced even when waiting for the customer.

  Further, in the volume switch 465, when the knob 466 is set to the eco mode, the volume is set to a large volume value as in the case of “3”. In FIG. 4B, a knob 466 indicates a case where the eco mode is set. The volume can be adjusted by software (software volume), and the relationship between the software volume and the hardware volume will be described later.

  Note that the volume switch 465 may be mounted on the image sound control unit 460 described later. In addition, the level of the volume of the volume switch 465 is shown in the above example, but may be any number of levels. Further, when the eco mode is set, the volume is not limited to a large volume value, and a small or medium volume value may be set. The volume is set to a knob type using the knob 466, but this may be a dial type. Further, when the eco mode is set, the illuminance reduction of the lamp display is not limited to 85%, and the luminance reduction of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device is not limited to 50%. When the eco mode is set, the luminance / illuminance may be changed so that the lamp display is brighter than the liquid crystal display device. Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed in the state (customer waiting state) after the gaming machine 100 shifts to the customer waiting state, even if the volume changeover switch 465 is not set to the eco mode, it automatically enters the eco mode. It may be set.

  In addition, a separate eco mode switch (luminance / illuminance changing means) separate from the volume changeover switch 465 may be provided. Further, when the single eco mode switch is provided as described above, the eco mode switch may be mounted on the main control unit 400. In this case, among the lamp indicators controlled by the main side, specific lamp indicators (for example, the first special symbol hold indicator 104c, the second special symbol hold indicator 104d, and the normal symbol hold indicator 104f) are You may change so that illumination intensity may fall. Of course, the volume switch 465 may be mounted on the main control unit 400.

  Returning to FIG. 4A, an effect button (chance button) 142 and an effect key 144 are connected to the input side of the effect control unit 450 in addition to the main control unit 400, and in response to an operation pressed by the player. Operation data output from the effect button 142 and the effect key 144 are acquired.

  The image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 are connected to the output side of the effect control unit 450, and the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450 transmits the data and commands transmitted from the main control unit 400, the effect button 142, or the effect. Based on the input signal from the key 144, the timer, the setting of the volume changeover switch 465, etc., the program stored in the sub ROM 452 is read and the arithmetic processing is performed. 460 or the lamp control unit 470.

  The sub CPU 451 receives control signals such as a one-way strobe signal, an image control command signal, and a lamp control command signal from the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400 via an input circuit, and when the strobe signal is input, The CPU 451 is configured to recognize this control command. For example, when a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation pattern of a special symbol is received, the contents of the received variation pattern designation command are analyzed, and the main display device 108, the speaker 138, a frame gimmick (effect handle device 492, retractable 137, Data for causing the patrol lamp 139, the chance button 142), the board gimmick 109, the frame decoration lamp 141, etc. to execute a predetermined effect is generated, and such data is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470.

  The sub ROM 452 of the effect control unit 450 stores a program for effect control, data necessary for determining various games, and a table. For example, the sub ROM 452 includes a variation effect pattern determination table for determining an effect pattern based on a variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 400, an effect symbol determination table for determining a combination of effect symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the like. It is remembered.

  The sub RAM 453 of the effect control unit 450 functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 451 performs arithmetic processing, and has a plurality of storage areas. In the sub RAM 451, a game state storage area, an effect mode storage area, an effect pattern storage area, an effect symbol storage area, a gate / various winning device data storage area, an effect random number value storage area, an abnormality related information storage area, a date / time information storage Area, login state storage area, calculation data storage area, various flag storage areas, firing operation information storage area, player information storage area, game history information storage area, code information storage area, various timers and counters, etc. Yes.

  Further, the sub RAM 453 constitutes a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means whose whole or a part (for example, abnormality related information storage area) is backed up by a backup power source. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine 100 is stopped, all or a part of the data stored in the sub-RAM 453 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The content is retained. Thereby, even when the power supply is stopped, predetermined storage such as abnormality-related information stored in the sub-RAM 453 is retained. Note that all or part of the sub-RAM 453 may be configured as FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM) as nonvolatile memory as nonvolatile storage means. Further, similarly to the main RAM 403, a RAM clear switch for instructing to erase the contents of data stored in the sub RAM 453 may be provided. When the RAM clear switch is provided as described above, only the related person can operate the RAM clear restriction button for preventing the game history from being deleted by a third party in the effect control unit 450. You may make it provide with an aspect.

  A payout control unit 440 (payout motor) as sub-control means performs payout control of game balls. The payout control unit 440 includes a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU 441, a payout ROM 442, and a payout RAM 443, and is connected to the main control unit 400 and also to a card unit (not shown) via a ball lending connection board or the like. ing. Also, the payout control unit 440 is connected to the main control unit 400 and the card unit (ball lending connection board) so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally.

  Further, on the input side of the payout control unit 440, a ball-free switch 445 for detecting that there is no game ball to be paid out from a counter case containing a payout control unit 440 (not shown). A payout ball counting switch 446 for counting the number of game balls that have been taken out, a rotor rotation switch 447 for detecting the rotation of the rotor of the payout motor 440, a glass frame opening switch 483a for detecting that the glass frame 150 has been opened, and an inner frame An inner frame opening switch 483b for detecting that 170 is opened is connected.

  The various input switches described above are connected to the input side of the payout control unit 440 via an input interface IC (not shown), like the main control unit 400. This interface IC is provided with an abnormality detection processing circuit for detecting an abnormality such as disconnection (not connected) or short circuit of the input switch. When such an abnormality occurs in the input switch, a switch abnormality detection signal is detected. Is output to the main control unit 400 via the payout control unit 440.

Further, on the output side of the payout control unit 440, a launch control unit 430 and a payout driving unit 444 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on a winning signal or a ball lending signal are connected.
Thus, the detection signals output from the ballless switch 445, the payout ball counting switch 446, the glass frame opening switch 483a, and the inner frame opening switch 483b are input to the payout control unit 440 and then from the payout control unit 440 to the main. Input to the control unit 400. Here, the detection signal input from the glass frame opening switch 483a and the inner frame opening switch 483b to the payout control unit 440 is a single signal indicating that the door is open from the payout control unit 440. It is output as a detection signal and input to the main control unit 400. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the system configuration and wiring for abnormality processing described later, thereby reducing costs.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the glass frame opening switch 483a and the inner frame opening switch 483b are connected to the payout control unit 440 in consideration of wiring routing or the like from the arrangement relationship between the main control unit 400 and the payout control unit 440. However, the glass frame opening switch 483a and the inner frame opening switch 483b may be directly connected to the main control unit 400. Further, the glass frame opening switch 483a and the inner frame opening switch 483b are hereinafter collectively referred to as “door opening switch 483” as shown in FIG.

  The payout CPU 441 reads out a program stored in the payout ROM based on input signals from the payout ball count switch 446 and a ball lending switch (not shown), and performs arithmetic processing. Specifically, when the payout CPU 441 receives a payout number designation command generated when a game ball wins a predetermined winning device from the main control unit 400, the predetermined number according to the content of the payout number designation command. The game ball is controlled to be paid out (prize ball control), and the payout driving unit 444 is driven to pay out a predetermined game ball.

  The payout CPU 441 confirms connection with a card unit (not shown) and then inputs a ball lending signal from the ball lending switch, and controls to pay out a specified number of game balls while exchanging information with the card unit ( Ball lending control) is performed, and the payout driving unit 444 is driven to pay out a predetermined game ball. The payout ROM 442 stores programs executed by the payout CPU 441, various data, and the like. The payout RAM 443 is used as a working memory for the payout CPU 441.

  A lamp control unit 470 as a sub-control means includes a lamp CPU 471, a lamp ROM 472, and a lamp RAM 473, an effect control unit 450 is connected to the input side, and a first identification display (fourth symbol display) is connected to the output side. ) 106a, second identification display (fourth symbol display) 106b, panel lamp 110, frame lamp 140, frame decoration lamp 141, surrounding lamp 143, chance button lamp 475, patrol lamp 139, etc. A drive device such as a drive unit 491, an effect handle device 492, a retractable motor 481, a patrol motor 482, and the like are connected, and according to the effect contents set in the effect control unit 450 based on a command sent from the effect control unit 450. Control various devices connected to the output side.

  That is, the lamp control unit 470 serves as an informing means, an identification indicator (fourth symbol display) 106 provided on the game board 102, a board lamp 110, an on-frame lamp 140 provided on the glass frame 150, a frame decoration. Lighting control is performed on LEDs such as the lamp 141 (including the surrounding lamp 143), the chance button lamp 475, the patrol lamp 139, and the like. In addition, the lamp control unit 470 controls energization of a panel gimmick driving unit 491 configured by an electric solenoid, a motor, or the like that operates the panel gimmick 109 in a predetermined manner, so that the upper gimmick 109a, the lower gimmick 109b, the left gimmick 109c, An effect by the right gimmick 109d and an energization control of the effect handle device 492 (vibrator motor 493, air sending fan 494, flash LED 495) are performed, and a big hit finalizing notice effect such as air vibration or P-FLASH is executed.

  Further, the lamp control unit 470 controls energization of the retractable motor 481 and the patrol motor 482 to control the opening and closing of the retractable 137, to rotate the patrol 139 when the retractable 137 is opened, and further to the chance button motor 474. And the chance button 142 is moved up and down.

  The lamp CPU 471 performs arithmetic processing when controlling lighting equipment, a driving device, and the like. The lamp ROM 472 is a program executed by the lamp CPU 471 and various data (lighting / flashing pattern data of lighting equipment and light emission color pattern data (light emission pattern data) according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 450), , Operation pattern data of the driving device) and the like are stored. The lamp RAM 473 is used as a working memory for the lamp CPU 471. The lamp CPU 471 selects and reads out the pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 472 corresponding to the command sent from the effect control unit 450, and based on the read pattern data, the lighting device and the driving device are selected. Control with predetermined illuminance and operation.

  The image sound control unit 460 as the sub control means is connected to the effect control unit 450 on the input side, and connected to the sub display device 107, the main display device 108, and the speaker 138 on the output side. Based on the sent command, the sub display device 107, the main display device 108, and the speaker 138 are controlled as notification means connected to the output side in accordance with the content of the effect set by the effect control unit 450.

  The image sound control unit 460 performs image display control of the sub display device 107 and the main display device 108, a host CPU 461 having a temporary storage area functioning as a work area of the host CPU 461, and control processing of the host CPU 461. A host ROM 462 storing programs, a CGROM (not shown) storing image data, a VRAM (not shown) having a frame buffer for drawing image data, a VDP (not shown) serving as an image processor, and a sound control circuit (not shown) are provided. .

  Based on the effect pattern designation command received from the effect control unit 450, the host CPU 461 instructs the sub display device 107 and the main display device 108 to display the image data stored in the CGROM in the VDP with a predetermined luminance. The VDP draws image data stored in the CGROM in the frame buffer of the VRAM based on an instruction from the host CPU 461. Next, a video signal (RGB signal or the like) is generated based on the image data stored in the display frame buffer in the VRAM, and the generated video signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device (sub display device 107 and main display device 108). Output to.

  The sound control circuit includes an audio ROM that stores a large number of audio data. The sound control circuit reads out a predetermined program based on a command transmitted from the effect control unit 450, and a volume selector switch ( Based on the setting of the (hardware volume) 465 and the software volume, whether or not an error is occurring, the audio output control in the speaker (audio output device) 138 is performed. For example, the speaker (sound output device) 138 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc., and performs effects by sound. In addition, the speaker (sound output device) 138 is operated in accordance with the above-described vibrator motor 493, air delivery fan 494, or flash LED 495, that is, a predetermined sound effect (for example, “Cuen, An announcement sound such as “Cuien” indicating the confirmation of a big hit is also performed.

  The launch control unit 430 as sub-control means performs launch control of the game ball. The launch control unit 430 includes a launch CPU 431, a launch ROM 432, and a launch RAM 433. In addition to the payout control unit 440, a dial 132 and a stop button 134 are connected to the input side, and a launch device 434 is connected to the output side. ing. The launch CPU 431 performs arithmetic processing when performing various controls related to the launch device 434. The launch ROM 432 stores programs executed by the launch CPU 431, various data, and the like. The launch RAM 433 is used as a working memory for the launch CPU 431.

  The firing control unit 430 inputs a touch signal from a touch sensor (not shown) of the dial 132 and, based on a voltage supplied from a launch volume (not shown) of the dial 132, includes a launching solenoid (not shown) that configures the launching device 434. Control to energize the ball feed solenoid.

  The touch sensor is provided inside the handle 130, and is configured by a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the dial 132. When the touch sensor detects that the player has touched the dial 132, the touch sensor outputs a touch signal that permits energization of the firing solenoid to the firing control unit 430. As a major premise, the launch control unit 430 is configured not to launch a game ball into the game area 114 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor.

  The firing volume is provided directly connected to a rotating portion where the dial 132 rotates, and is configured by a variable resistor. The firing volume divides a constant voltage (for example, 5V) applied to the firing volume by a variable resistor, and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control unit 430 (varies the voltage supplied to the firing control unit 430). ). The firing control unit 430 energizes the firing solenoid based on the voltage divided by the firing volume and rotates the launching member of the firing solenoid, thereby firing the game ball into the game area 114.

  The launching solenoid is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a launching member is directly connected to the launching solenoid, and the launching member is rotated by rotating the launching solenoid. Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid is set to about 100 (times / minute) based on the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 430. As a result, the number of game balls to be fired in one minute is about 100 (pieces / minute) because one ball is fired every time the firing solenoid rotates. That is, one game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds. The ball feed solenoid is composed of a linear solenoid, and sends out the game balls on the upper plate 128 one by one toward the launching member of the firing solenoid.

  The stop button 134 is a button that can stop the launch of the game ball even while the dial 132 is being rotated. The launch control unit 430 outputs the launch device 434 when a signal indicating that the stop button 134 is pressed is output. The operation of the launching solenoid and the ball feeding solenoid is stopped, and the launch of the game ball is stopped.

<Description of game content>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A and 5B, game contents in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment configured as described above will be described. In the jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery by winning the game ball to the first starter 116, the winning probability for the normal jackpot is 50%, and the winning probability for the probable jackpot is 50%. The jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery by winning the game ball to the second starter 118 has a winning probability of 100%.

  FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining the opening and closing timings of the first big winning device 120, the second big winning device 146, and the probability changing fixed region (V region) 204 in the case of the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit according to the present embodiment. It is explanatory drawing.

  FIG. 5A shows the opening of the first big winning device 120, the second big winning device 146, and the V area 204 in the big win game (hereinafter also referred to as “probability big hit game”) that is executed in the case of the probability variation big hit. Timing and closing timing are shown. Further, FIG. 5B shows the first big winning device 120, the second big winning device 146, and the V area 204 in the big hit game (hereinafter, also referred to as a normal big hit game) executed when the normal big hit. The opening timing and closing timing are shown.

  First, the probability variation big hit game will be described with reference to FIG. When the probable big hit game is started, the first grand prize winning device 120 is changed from the closed state to the open state after a predetermined opening time has elapsed, which is also referred to as “R”. ) Is started.

  In 1R, when nine game balls are won in the first grand prize winning device 120 or when the opening time is 29.5 seconds, the first big prize winning device 120 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and 1R ends. Thereafter, after 2 seconds have passed as an interval period between rounds, the first grand prize winning device 120 is opened and closed in the same manner as 1R, and 2R ends. Thereafter, similarly up to 3R is executed by opening and closing the first grand prize winning device 120 with an interval period of 2 seconds interposed therebetween.

  After the end of 3R, 4R is started after 2 seconds have passed as an interval period. In this 4R, the first big winning device 120 is opened and then closed 0.1 second, and then 0.9. After a lapse of seconds, it is again opened for 0.1 seconds. In other words, this 4R will end when 9 game balls are won or when 29.1 seconds have been repeated 30 times in the 0.1 second and 29 times in the closed state of 0.9 seconds, and 29.1 seconds have passed. Yes. This is called the “pakapaka state” of the so-called grand prize winning device, and when it becomes this “pakapaka state”, it becomes difficult to win the game ball to the first big prize winning device 120.

  After 4R, from 5R to 7R, the same round game as 1R to 3R described above was performed, and after 7R, an interval period of 5 seconds longer than the previous 2 seconds passed as an interval period. Later, the second big prize winning device 146 changes from the closed state to the open state, and the final R, 8R, starts.

  In 8R, when nine game balls are won in the second grand prize winning device 146 or when the opening time is 29.5 seconds, the second big prize winning device 146 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and 8R ends. After that, when a predetermined ending time (10 seconds) elapses, the probability variation big hit game is ended. Here, the V region 204 changes from the closed state to the open state when the probability variation confirmation region opening / closing member (V hook) 202 is actuated 3 seconds after the second grand prize winning device 146 is opened. After 6 seconds from the start, the V-shaped honeycomb 202 is operated again to be in a closed state. In this way, when the second big winning device 146 is in the open state, the V hook 202 is operated to open the V region 204 for 6 seconds, so that the second big winning device 146 in 8R of the probability variation big hit game. One or more game balls entered will pass through the V region 204.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 5B, when the game ball passes through the V region 204, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high after the probability variation big hit game ends (for example, 1/46, and the low probability is 1 / 265) and the electric tulip 126 is frequently opened for a long time, and the execution interval of the special symbol lottery is shortened.

  Next, a normal jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal jackpot game, the opening / closing timings of the first big winning devices 120 from 1R to 7R are the same as those in the probability variation jackpot game described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. After the end of 7R, after an interval period of 2 seconds, which is the same as the previous 2 seconds, has passed, the second big prize winning device 146 changes from the closed state to the open state, and the final R, 8R, is started.

  In 8R, when the opening time of the second grand prize-winning device 146 has elapsed for 0.1 second, the second big prize-winning device 146 changes from the open state to the closed state, and 8R ends. That is, in the normal jackpot game 8R, the second big winning device 146 is instantaneously released, and therefore, the game ball hardly enters the second big winning device 146.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined ending time (10 seconds) elapses, the normal big hit game is ended. Here, the V region 204 is changed from the closed state to the open state 3 seconds after the second grand prize winning device 146 is opened, and from the open state 6 seconds after the open state, as in the probability variation big hit game. Closed. That is, in the normal big hit game, the V region 204 is opened 2.9 seconds after the second big winning device 146 is closed. In addition, due to the structure of the second grand prize winning device 146 shown in FIG. 2, it is normally impossible for the game ball to stay for 2.9 seconds inside the second big prize winning device 146. Therefore, in a normal big hit game, it is a mechanism that a game ball cannot normally pass through the V region 204.

  Here, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 in the present embodiment will be described. The gaming state of the gaming machine 100 includes at least a high probability (probability change) state, a short time state, a big hit gaming state, and a normal state. The high probability state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a high probability (for example, 1/46, and the low probability is 1/265).

  The short-time state means, for example, that the execution interval of the normal symbol lottery is shortened, the winning probability is increased, and the electric tulip 126 is controlled to be opened for a long time when the normal symbol lottery is won. 126 is a game state in which a game ball is frequently opened for a long time and game balls are frequently awarded to the second starter 118, and a special symbol lottery execution interval is shortened.

  The jackpot game state is a game state in which a jackpot game is executed in which a special symbol lottery is won (winning) and the first big winning device 120 and the second big winning device 146 are opened. The normal state is a normal gaming state that is not any of the above gaming states. The normal state and the big hit game state do not coexist with other game states, respectively, but the high-accuracy state and the short-time state may coexist with each other.

  In the short-time state, the player can execute a lot of special symbol lotteries in a short time with almost no decrease in game balls. In the following, the high-accuracy state and the short-time state are referred to as the high-accuracy / short-time state, and the short-time state rather than the high-accuracy state is referred to as the low-accuracy / short-time state. In the present embodiment, there is no gaming state (so-called latent probability variation) that is a highly accurate state and not a short-time state.

  Next, the game progress of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5-2 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the set of 5 times of big hits based on this embodiment. First, when a game is played in a normal state, the electric tulip 126 may be driven even if the game ball is launched so that the game ball flows down in the right region where the second starter 118 is disposed (that is, even if the player hits the right). The second starting device 118 arranged at the lower right of the gaming area 114 is hardly opened to prevent the game ball from winning, and the first starting device 116 arranged at the lower center of the gaming area 114 is used. In addition, game balls are difficult to win (see FIG. 1).

  Therefore, in the normal state, the player launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down (that is, strikes left) on the left side of the game area 114 (that is, the normal winning device 122 side). To win. Then, when the first starter 116 is won in the normal state and the first probable big hit is made, the right to set the big win five times is obtained (see FIG. 5-2).

  In the following, in detail, in the first probable big hit game, as described with reference to FIG. 5A, the second big winning device 146 can pass the V-region 204 in the V region 204 in 8R. Therefore, the game ball almost passes through the V region 204 as long as the player makes a right-hand hit with the first big winning device 120 and the second big winning device 146. Thus, the passing of the game ball through the V region 204 is a condition for winning the second probability variation big hit.

  When the game ball passes through the V region 204, the high probability / short time game state is set after the first chance change big hit game, the electric tulip 126 is frequently opened for a long time, and the second starter 118 is greatly won. It becomes easy. Further, unlike the big hit by the first starter 116, the big hit by the second starter 118 is only a probable big hit that allows the game ball to pass through the V region 204. As described above, the player hits the right toward the second starter 118 until the second big hit.

  If the player hits the right and wins the second starter 118 and wins the second probability change big hit, the game ball passes through the V region 204 at 8R by the right hit and the second time, as in the first probability change big hit game. After the probability variation big hit game, the high probability / short time gaming state is set, and the same state as after the first probability variation big hit game is set.

  After that, if the game ball passes through the V region 204 at 8R of the fifth probability variation big hit game after the third to fifth probability variation big hits in the same way, the winning probability of the big hit lottery after the fifth probability variation big hit game Is set to a low probability (1/265), and is set to a short time state limited to 100 rotations (up to 100 lottery lotteries). In other words, the low-accuracy / short-time state limited to 100 rotations is set for the short-time state. Thereafter, the normal state is set.

  As described above, when the probability variation big hit in the normal state (the so-called first hit positive probability big hit), the right of the set of five big hits can be obtained with a high probability. Here, when the big hit lottery (winning probability 1/265) is won after the completion of the set of 5 big hits as described above (a so-called continuous change), or the low probability / short time state limited to 100 rotations with respect to the short time state In the case of a probable big hit, the set of 5 big hits starts again. In this way, if the probable big hit is made when the winning probability of the big hit is low, a set of five big hits will be started.

  Next, a description will be given of the case where the first starter 116 is won and the normal big win is made when the winning probability of the big win is low (that is, in the normal state or the low probability / short time state). In this case, as described with reference to FIG. 5-1 (b), the second big winning device 146 is instantaneously released and the V region 204 enters the second big winning device 146 in 8R of the normal big hit game. The game ball is released when it cannot pass. Therefore, in the case of a normal big hit, since the game ball does not pass through the V region 204, it is not controlled to the high-probability / time-short game state but is controlled to the normal state. As a result, in the case of a normal big hit, a set of five big hits does not occur.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where a normal big hit is made by winning the first starter 116 in any of the second to fifth big hits in the set of five big hits described above. In this case, the winning probability of the big hit lottery is set to a low probability after the normal big hit game of the normal big hit, and the set of five big hits ends (that is, falls to a low probability). However, in this embodiment, in such a case, a time reduction state limited to 100 rotations is given as a relief measure after the normal big hit game. Even if the game ball does not pass through the V region 204 of the second big prize winning device 146 in the 8R of the probability variable big hit game despite the probability big hit game, as a relief measure, after the probability variable big hit game 100 A short-time state limited to rotation is given.

<Main processing of main control unit 400>
Next, main processing executed by the main CPU 401 in the main control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400.

  Referring to FIG. 6, when power supply to gaming machine 100 is started, a system reset occurs in main CPU 401, and main CPU 401 performs the following main processing in response to the input of a reset signal. First, in step S600 (hereinafter, step S is also simply referred to as “S”), the main CPU 401 supplies power to the gaming machine 100 this time when the normal RAM clear switch 405 is turned on (input of a RAM clear signal). ) Or power recovery without turning on the RAM clear switch 405 (input of a RAM clear signal) that starts supplying power after an unexpected power failure. Determine.

  In S600, when it is determined that the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 405 being turned on (S600: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S602, and effects control as a sub-control means on the sub-side. To the unit 450. As will be described later, when the production control unit 450 receives the RAM clear preparation command, a display or a sound output for turning on the RAM clear switch 405 is performed again, and the RAM clear switch 405 is again turned on. It has become. Then, the process proceeds to S604, and the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on again.

  If it is determined in S604 that the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on again (S604: Yes), the main CPU 401 advances the process to S608. On the other hand, when it is determined in S604 that the RAM clear switch 405 is not turned on again (S604: No), the main CPU 401 repeatedly executes the process of S604 until the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on again. To do.

  In step S608, the main CPU 401 transmits a power-on command to the effect control unit 450, moves the process to step S610, reads the activation program from the main ROM 402 in response to power-on, and sets the main RAM 403 in an access-permitted state. Then, the storage area of the main RAM 403 is cleared, and an initialization process for performing necessary settings is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S600 that the power is not restored without the RAM clear switch 405 being turned on (S600: No), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S620 and transmits a power restoration command to the effect control unit 450. To do. Then, the process proceeds to S622, and the main CPU 401 performs a predetermined power recovery process. In this power restoration processing, for example, the main RAM 403 is allowed to be in an access-permitted state in the same manner as when the power is turned on, and data check of the backup RAM area of the main RAM 403 (for example, parity check using check data backed up when the power is turned off), etc. I do. When the process of S622 is completed, the storage area of the register and the main RAM 403 is returned to the state when the power is unexpectedly cut off, and the gaming state is restored.

  When the process of S610 or S622 is completed, the process moves to S630, and the main CPU 401 updates initial random values of specific random numbers, for example, a jackpot random number, a design random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number, which will be described later, Thereafter, the process of S630 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed. Here, the initial random number value is an initial value of each random number that is updated in S700 in a timer interrupt process described later. Note that the processing may be stopped until the next interrupt processing is performed without performing the processing of S630 (HALT instruction).

<Timer interrupt processing of main control unit 400>
Next, a characteristic process of the present invention will be described with reference to a flowchart regarding the progress of the game in the gaming machine 100. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. This process is performed during normal operation except for special cases such as when the gaming machine 100 is turned on (power is restored) or when the power is turned off by a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main control unit 400. Are repeatedly executed every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms). 7 is performed based on a program stored in the main ROM 402, but processing not mainly related to the present invention is omitted. ing.

  With reference to FIG. 7, first, in S700, the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400 executes a random number update process. That is, a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a big hit random number, a design random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number is executed. Here, the big hit random number is a random number for determining whether the special symbol lottery is won or lost.

  The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) when winning in the special symbol lottery. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not a reach effect is performed when a special symbol lottery is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the special symbol variation time (that is, the execution time of the effect symbol variation effect).

  In the random number update process of S700, the big hit random number, the design random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, etc. are each added and updated by one. That is, it is counted up. Each lottery is performed in the starting device switch (SW) process in S702 and the normal symbol operation gate switch (SW) process in S704, and each random number is acquired. The special symbol process in S706 and the normal symbol process in S708 described later. Used in. Note that the random number counter that performs the processing of S700 is typically a loop counter, and when the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 264 for the big hit random number) is reached (when the random number counter makes one round). The random number counter is again reset to the minimum value 0, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number value at that time.

In step S702, the main CPU 401 executes starter switch processing. The starter switch process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
In step S704, the main CPU 401 executes gate switch processing. That is, the state of the normal symbol operation gate switch 413 is monitored, and when the normal symbol operation gate switch 413 is turned on (when the detection signal of the game ball is output from the normal symbol operation gate switch 413), It is determined whether or not the number of holds is less than the upper limit value, and when it is determined that the number of holds is less than the upper limit value, a normal symbol operation gate switch process for obtaining a random number used in the normal symbol process of S708 described later is executed. .

In step S706, the main CPU 401 executes special symbol processing. The special symbol process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.
In step S708, the main CPU 401 executes normal symbol processing. That is, it is determined whether or not the random number acquired in the normal symbol operation gate switch process of S704 matches the predetermined hit random number and the normal symbol lottery is won. Then, after the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 104e of the display 104, the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed.

In S710, the main CPU 401 executes a special winning device process. The special winning device process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.
In step S712, the main CPU 401 executes an electric tulip process. That is, the electric tulip 126 is operated when the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 104e by the normal symbol processing of S708 is a predetermined winning symbol (that is, when the normal symbol lottery is won).

  In the electric tulip process, the main CPU 401 sets the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol process of S708 in the normal state to 1/10, and in the low accuracy / time short state and the high accuracy / time short state, the normal S 708 normal In the symbol processing, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is increased to 9/10.

  When the normal symbol lottery is won, in the normal state, in S710, a control is executed to execute the operation of opening the electric tulip 126 for 0.15 seconds (a state where the game ball can win the second starter 118) once. Do. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the main CPU 401 performs control to execute the operation of opening the electric tulip 126 for 1.80 seconds in S710 three times in the low / short time state and the high / short time state. .

  With the above processing, the electric tulip 126 is in a state in which it is difficult to operate in the open state in the normal state, while on the other hand, a state in which the electric tulip 126 is easily operated in the open state in the low accuracy / short time state and the high accuracy / short time state (so-called electric Chu support). Become. When the electric tulip 126 is operated, a game ball can be won in the second starting device 118, and the game ball is frequently won in the second starting device 118, so that the second special symbol lottery is frequently performed. Will be.

  In S713, the main CPU 401 executes a normal winning device process. That is, the main CPU 401 performs a winning frequency abnormality error executed on the sub-board (sub-control means) described later based on the winning signal from the normal winning device switch 422 based on the winning of the game ball in the normal winning device 122. A normal winning device winning command for executing processing is set in the main RAM 403. The set normal winning device winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process of the next S716.

  In S714, the main CPU 401 executes prize ball processing. That is, the main CPU 401 receives a prize from each winning device (first starting device switch 410, second starting device switch 411, first large winning device switch 414, second large winning device discharge switch 418, normal winning device switch 422). Based on the signal, a payout command for instructing the payout control unit 440 to pay out a predetermined prize ball is set in the main RAM 403, and the management of the number of winning game balls and the payout of prize balls according to the number of winning balls are controlled. Note that the set payout command is transmitted to the payout control unit 440 by the output process of the next S716.

In step S715, the main CPU 401 executes an abnormality process. The abnormality process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.
In step S716, the main CPU 401 executes output processing. In other words, various commands set in the main RAM 403 and information necessary for production are produced by the special symbol process of S706, the big prize device process of S710, the normal prize device process of S713, the prize ball process of S714, the abnormal process of S715, etc. The data is output to the control unit 450 or the payout control unit 440.

<Starter switch processing>
Based on FIG. 8, the starter switch process in S702 of FIG. 7 will be described here. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the contents of starter switch processing performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. First, in S800, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the first starter switch 410 is turned on by winning a game ball in the first starter 116 based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first starter switch 410. Determine. If the main CPU 401 determines that the first starter switch 410 is ON (S800: Yes), the process proceeds to S802. If the main CPU 401 determines that the first starter switch 410 is OFF (S800: No), the process proceeds to S812. .

  In step S <b> 802, the main CPU 401 reads the upper limit value Umax <b> 1 (in this embodiment, “5”) of the number of first special symbol lottery reservations from the main ROM 402, and stores the number of first special symbol lottery reservations U <b> 1 stored in the main RAM 403. Is less than the upper limit value Umax1. If the main CPU 401 determines that U1 is less than Umax1 (S802: Yes), it moves the process to S804. If it determines that U1 is equal to or greater than Umax1 (S800: No), it moves the process to S812.

  In step S <b> 804, the main CPU 401 rewrites the value of the holding number U <b> 1 stored in the main RAM 403 to a value obtained by adding 1. In S806, the main CPU 401 acquires a set of random numbers (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) used for the first special symbol lottery and the like, and sets each of the acquired random numbers in time series. They are stored in the main RAM 403 in order. Each time the value of the holding number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is subtracted by 1 in the process of S910 of FIG. 9 described later, the random number set stored in the main RAM 403 is stored in order from the oldest stored time. One set is deleted. As a result, for example, when the value of the holding number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is “3”, the set of the last three random numbers acquired by the processing of S806 is stored in the main RAM 403 in time series order. It will be.

  In step S808, the main CPU 401 performs pre-determination processing. Specifically, the main CPU 401 reads the jackpot random number acquired in the latest processing of S806 and stored in the main RAM 403 (that is, the jackpot random number by the first special symbol lottery stored most recently). Based on whether or not the winning value of the jackpot stored in the main ROM 402 matches, it is determined in advance (so-called prefetching) whether the result of the first special symbol lottery using the jackpot random number is a jackpot or a loss. .

  In step S <b> 810, the CPU 401 sets a first hold number increase command for notifying that the hold number of the first special symbol lottery has increased by 1 in the main RAM 403. Here, the first pending number increase command includes information (hereinafter referred to as “preliminary determination information”) indicating the result of the preliminary determination performed in the process of S808.

  In S812, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the game ball has won the second starter 118 and the second starter switch 411 is turned on based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the second starter switch 411. To do. If it is determined that the second starter switch 411 is turned on (S812: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S814, and if it is determined that it is OFF (S812: No), the process is as shown in FIG. The process returns to the timer interrupt process (S704: gate switch process).

  In S <b> 814, the main CPU 401 reads the upper limit value Umax <b> 2 (second number “5” in the present embodiment) of the second special symbol lottery from the main ROM 402, and stores the second special symbol lottery U2 stored in the main RAM 403. Is less than the upper limit value Umax2. When it is determined that U2 is less than Umax2 (S814: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S816, and when it is determined that U2 is equal to or greater than Umax2 (S816: No), the process is performed by the timer of FIG. The process returns to the interrupt process (S704: gate switch process).

  In step S816, the main CPU 401 rewrites the value of the holding number U2 stored in the main RAM 403 to a value obtained by adding 1. In S818, the main CPU 401 acquires a set of random numbers (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) used for the second special symbol lottery etc., and sets each of the acquired random numbers in time series. They are stored in the main RAM 403 in order. Each time the value of the second special symbol lottery holding number U2 is decremented by 1 by the processing of S906 in FIG. 9 to be described later, the set of random numbers stored in the main RAM 403 is stored in order from the oldest stored time. One set is deleted. Thereby, for example, when the value of the number of holdings U2 of the second special symbol lottery is “3”, the set of the last three random numbers obtained by the processing of S818 is stored in the main RAM 403 in time series order. It will be.

  In S820, the main CPU 401 performs a pre-determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 401 reads the jackpot random number acquired in the latest processing of S818 and stored in the main RAM 403 (that is, the jackpot random number by the second special symbol lottery stored most recently). Based on whether or not the winning value of the jackpot stored in the main ROM 402 matches, it is determined in advance whether the result of the second special symbol lottery using the jackpot random number is a jackpot or a loss.

  In S822, the main CPU 401 sets, in the main RAM 403, a second hold number increase command for notifying that the hold number of the second special symbol lottery has increased by one. Here, the second pending number increase command includes information (preliminary determination information) indicating the result of the preliminary determination performed in the process of S820. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S704: gate switch process) in FIG. The first hold number increase command set in S810 and the second hold number increase command set in S822 are transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output processing in S716 (see FIG. 7).

<Special symbol processing>
Based on FIG. 9, the special symbol process in S706 of FIG. 7 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol processing performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the special symbol process, first, in S900, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the gaming machine 100 is in a big hit game based on information stored in the main RAM 403 (typically information by a flag). . If the main CPU 401 determines that the game is a big hit game (S900: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S708: normal symbol process) in FIG. No), the process proceeds to S902.

  In step S <b> 902, the main CPU 401 determines whether the special symbols on the first special symbol display 104 a or the second special symbol display 104 b are being displayed. If the main CPU 401 determines that the special symbol variation display is being performed (S902: Yes), the process proceeds to S920. If the main CPU 401 determines that the special symbol variation is not occurring (S902: No), the processing proceeds to S904. Move.

  In S904, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the holding number U2 stored in the main RAM 403 is 1 or more (whether or not the second special symbol lottery is held). When the main CPU 401 determines that U2 is 1 or more (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S906, and when it is determined that U2 is 0 (S904: No), the process proceeds to S908.

  In step S906, the main CPU 401 rewrites the hold number U2 stored in the main RAM 403 to a value obtained by subtracting one. At that time, the main CPU 401 reads out from the main RAM 403 the one with the earliest storage time from the set of random numbers acquired in S818 of FIG. 8 stored in the main RAM 403, deletes it from the main RAM 403, and moves the process to S912.

  In S908, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the holding number U1 stored in the main RAM 403 is 1 or more (whether or not the first special symbol lottery is held). When it is determined that U1 is 1 or more (S908: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S910, and when it is determined that U1 is 0 (S908: No), the process moves to S911.

  In step S910, the main CPU 401 rewrites the hold number U1 stored in the main RAM 403 to a value obtained by subtracting one. At that time, the main CPU 401 reads out the random number set stored in the main RAM 403 in S806 of FIG. 8 that has the earliest storage time and deletes it from the main RAM 403, and then moves the process to S912.

  In step S <b> 911, the main CPU 401 sets a demo designation command in the main RAM 403. Here, the demonstration designation command indicates that the sub-display device 107 and the main display device 108 are sent to the effect control unit 450 based on the number of holding times U1 and U2 in the first and second special symbol lottery being “0”. Is a command for instructing to display a demonstration screen for waiting for a customer. The demonstration designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7). When the processing of S911 is completed, the main CPU 401 determines that there is no special symbol lottery to be executed, and therefore returns the processing to the timer interrupt processing (S708: normal symbol processing) of FIG.

As described above, in the special symbol processing in the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is preferentially digested.
In S912, the main CPU 401 executes a big hit determination process for determining whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or a loss.

<Big hit judgment processing>
Based on FIG. 10, the big hit determination process in S912 of FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big hit determination process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. First, in S1000, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a big win has been won in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, when the main CPU 401 performs the process of S1000 following the process of S906 in FIG. 9, the big hit random number read from the main RAM 403 in the process of S1000 is the jackpot winning value stored in the main ROM 402 It is determined whether or not a big hit is made in the second special symbol lottery based on whether or not the two match.

  On the other hand, when the processing of S1000 is performed following the processing of S910 of FIG. 9, the main CPU 401 matches the jackpot random number read from the main RAM 403 in the processing of S1000 with the jackpot winning value stored in the main ROM 402. Based on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the big win in the first special symbol lottery.

  If the main CPU 401 determines that it is a big hit (S1000: Yes), it moves the process to S1002. If it determines that it is not a big hit (S1000: No), it moves the process to S1008. In S1002, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the probability variation big hit. Specifically, when the main CPU 401 executes the process of S1002 following the process of S906 in FIG. 9, the symbol random number read from the main RAM 403 in the process of S1002 is the predetermined value stored in the main ROM 402. Based on whether or not they match, it is determined whether or not a probable big hit has been made in the second special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, when executing the process of S1002 following the process of S910 in FIG. 9, the main CPU 401 confirms whether the symbol random number read from the main RAM 403 in the process of S1002 matches the predetermined value stored in the main ROM 402. Based on whether or not, it is determined whether or not a probable big hit has been made in the first special symbol lottery. If the main CPU 401 determines that the probability variation is a big hit (S1002: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004. If the main CPU 401 determines that the probability variation is not a big hit (that is, a normal big hit) (S1002: No), the processing is performed. Move to S1006.

  In step S <b> 1004, the main CPU 401 sets, in the main RAM 403, the probability variation big hit symbol indicating that the probability variation big hit is made in the special symbol lottery as the special symbol stop symbol in the setting information. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the processing to the special symbol processing (S914: variation pattern selection processing) of FIG.

  In step S <b> 1006, the main CPU 401 sets a normal big hit symbol indicating that a normal big win has been won in the special symbol lottery in the main RAM 403 as a special symbol stop symbol in the setting information. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the processing to the special symbol processing (S914: variation pattern selection processing) of FIG.

  In step S1008, the main CPU 401 sets, in the main RAM 403, a lost symbol indicating that the special symbol has been lost in the special symbol lottery as a special symbol stop symbol in the setting information. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the processing to the special symbol processing (S914: variation pattern selection processing) of FIG.

  Here, the description returns to the special symbol process of FIG. In S914 of FIG. 9, the main CPU 401 executes a variation pattern selection process for selecting a special symbol variation time (execution time of the effect symbol variation effect).

<Change pattern selection processing>
Based on FIGS. 11 and 12, the variation pattern selection processing in S914 of FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400, and FIG. 12 is for explaining the special symbol variation time selected in the variation pattern selection process of FIG. It is explanatory drawing. In the following, after explaining the special symbol variation time with reference to FIG. 12, the variation pattern selection processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the special symbol variation time is selected using a variation time table. Further, the variable time table is switched and used depending on whether the game state is related to the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, whether or not a big hit is made, and whether or not a reach effect is performed. First, the high-accuracy / time-short state variable time table set used in the high-precision / time-short state will be described.

  The variable time table set for the high accuracy / short time state includes a variable time table in the case of the first special symbol lottery and a variable time table in the case of the second special symbol lottery. The fluctuation time table in the case of the first special symbol lottery is the first fluctuation time table for big hit without reach (3 seconds) used in the case of a big hit without reach effect, and the first used in the case of big hit with a reach effect. Fluctuation time table for 1 hit with a reach (12 seconds), first fluctuation time table for a loss without reach (12 seconds) used in the case of a loss without reach effect, and a first time used for a loss with reach effect It consists of a variation time table (12 seconds) for loss with one reach.

  The fluctuation time table in the case of the second special symbol lottery is the second fluctuation big time table for reach without big reach (3 seconds) used for the big hit without reach effect, the second used for the big hit with reach effect. Fluctuation time table for reach with big reach (12 seconds), Fluctuation time table for second loss without reach used in the case of loss without reach production (7 seconds, 3 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 0.5 seconds) and It consists of a variation time table (12 seconds) for losing with second reach used in the case of losing with reach production.

  When the second reach-less variation time table (7 seconds, 3 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 0.5 seconds) is used to select the special symbol variation time, the number of the second special symbol lottery is 0 or 7 is selected as the special symbol variation time when 1, 2 seconds is selected as the special symbol variation time when the second special symbol lottery is 2, and special when the second special symbol lottery is 3 When the symbol variation time is 1.5 seconds, and the second special symbol lottery holding number is 4, 0.5 seconds is selected as the special symbol variation time.

  Next, the variable time table set for the low accuracy / short time state used in the low accuracy / short time state will be described. The variable time table set for the low probability / short time state includes a variable time table in the case of the first special symbol lottery and a variable time table in the case of the second special symbol lottery.

  The fluctuation time table in the case of the first special symbol lottery is the first fluctuation big time table for reach without big reach (3 seconds) that is used in the case of big hit without reach effect, and the first that is used in the case of big hit without reach effect. Fluctuation time table for a big hit with one reach (12 seconds), a first fluctuation time table for a loss without reach (12 seconds) used for a loss without reach production, and a first used for a loss with reach Consists of a fluctuation time table (12 seconds) for loss with reach.

  The fluctuation time table in the case of the second special symbol lottery is the second fluctuation time table for big hit without reach (3 seconds) used in the case of a big hit without reach effect, and the first used in the case of big hit with a reach effect. Fluctuation time table for large hits with 2 reach (30 seconds, 50 seconds, 60 seconds), Fluctuation time table for second loss without reach used in case of loss without reach production (12 seconds, 2.5 seconds) and reach It consists of a second reach variation time variation table (30 seconds, 50 seconds, 60 seconds) used in the case of a loss with effects.

  The variation table for the big hit with the second reach (30 seconds, 50 seconds, 60 seconds) or the variation time table for the loss with the second reach (30 seconds, 50 seconds, 60 seconds) is used to select the special symbol variation time. In this case, one of 30 seconds, 50 seconds, and 60 seconds is selected as the special symbol variation time by a predetermined lottery.

  When the second reach-less variation time table (12 seconds, 2.5 seconds) is used to select the special symbol variation time, the special symbol variation time is set when the number of the second special symbol lottery is 0 or 1 When 12 seconds is selected and the number of second special symbol lotteries held is 2 to 4, 2.5 seconds is selected as the special symbol variation time.

  Next, the normal state variation time table set used in the normal state will be described. The normal state variable time table set includes a variable time table in the case of the first special symbol lottery and a variable time table in the case of the second special symbol lottery.

  In the case of the first special symbol lottery, the variation time table is a first variation jackpot variation time table (30 seconds, 50 seconds, 60 seconds) used in the case of a big hit with reach production, and a loss without reach production. The first reachless variation time table (12 seconds, 8 seconds, 4 seconds, 2 seconds) used in the case of the first and the first reach loss variation time table used in the case of the loss with reach effect. (30 seconds, 50 seconds, 60 seconds).

  The variation time table in the case of the second special symbol lottery is the second variation jackpot variation time table (30 seconds, 50 seconds, 60 seconds) used in the case of a big win with reach production, and the loss without reach production. The second reachless variation time table (12 seconds, 8 seconds, 4 seconds, 2 seconds) used in the case of the second and the second reachable variation time table used in the case of the loss with reach effect. (30 seconds, 50 seconds, 60 seconds).

  When the variable time table for loss without first reach (12 seconds, 8 seconds, 4 seconds, 2 seconds) is used to select the special symbol variation time, the total number of pending reservations for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery 12 is selected as the special symbol variation time when is 0 or 1, 8 seconds is selected as the special symbol variation time when the total number of holdings is 2, and 4 seconds as the special symbol variation time when the total number of reservations is 3. Second is selected, and when the total number of holdings is 4 or more, 2 seconds is selected as the special symbol variation time.

  Similarly, when the second reachless variation time table (12 seconds, 8 seconds, 4 seconds, 2 seconds) is used to select the special symbol variation time, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery When the total number of holds is 0 or 1, 12 seconds is selected as the special symbol variation time. When the total number of reservations is 2, 8 seconds is selected as the special symbol variation time. When the total number of holds is 3, the special symbol variation is selected. 4 seconds is selected as the time, and when the total number of reservations is 4 or more, 2 seconds is selected as the special symbol variation time.

  Fluctuation time table for big hit with first reach, Fluctuation time table for loss with first reach, Fluctuation time table for big hit with second reach, or Fluctuation time table for loss with second reach (30 seconds, 50 seconds, 60 seconds) Is used for selecting the special symbol variation time, one of 30 seconds, 50 seconds, and 60 seconds is selected as the special symbol variation time by a predetermined lottery.

  Next, the variation pattern selection process will be described (see FIG. 11). In the variation pattern selection process, first, in S1100, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the variation in the special symbol this time is variation due to winning in the first starter 116. That is, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery related to the jackpot determination process in S912 of FIG. 9 is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. If the main CPU 401 determines that the fluctuation is caused by the first starter 116 (S1100: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102, and is not a fluctuation caused by the first starter 116 (that is, a fluctuation caused by the second starter 118). If it is determined (Yes) (S1102: No), the process proceeds to S1116.

  In step S1102, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a big hit has been made in the big hit determination process in step S912 in FIG. If it is determined that a big hit has been made (S1102: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S1104. If it is decided that a big hit has not been made (S1102: No), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S1106.

  In step S1104, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a reach effect is to be performed. Specifically, the main CPU 401 reads from the main RAM 403 the reach random number obtained together with the big hit random number obtained in S806 of FIG. 8 and whether or not the read reach random number matches a predetermined value stored in the main ROM 402. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a reach effect is to be performed. If the main CPU 401 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1108. If the main CPU 401 determines that the reach effect is not to be performed (S1104: No), the process proceeds to S1110.

  In S <b> 1108, the main CPU 401 sets the change set in the main RAM 403 as a use target by the process of setting the change time table set shown in FIGS. 13 and 16 to be described later from the change time table set described with reference to FIG. 12. The first reach jackpot variable time table included in the time table set is set as the variable time table to be used. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1130.

  In step S1110, the main CPU 401 uses the first reachless jackpot variable time table included in the variable time table set set in the main RAM 403 as a use target from the variable time table set described with reference to FIG. Set as a variable time table. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1130.

  In S1106, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a reach effect is to be performed, similar to S1104. If the main CPU 401 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to S1112. If the main CPU 401 determines that the reach effect is not to be performed (S1106: No), the process proceeds to S1114.

  In step S <b> 1112, the main CPU 401 uses the variable time table for loss with first reach included in the variable time table set set in the main RAM 403 as the use target among the variable time table set described with reference to FIG. 12. Set as a variable time table. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1130.

  In step S <b> 1114, the main CPU 401 uses the first reachless losing variation time table included in the variation time table set set in the RAM 403 as a use target, from the variation time table set described with reference to FIG. 12. Set as a variable time table. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1130.

  On the other hand, in S1116, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a big hit has been made in the big hit determination process in S912 of FIG. If the main CPU 401 determines that it has been a big hit (S1116: Yes), it moves the process to S1118. If it determines that it has not been a big hit (S1116: No), it moves the process to S1120.

  In S1118, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a reach effect is to be performed, as in S1104. If the main CPU 401 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (S1118: Yes), the process proceeds to S1122, and if it is determined that the reach effect is not to be performed (S1118: No), the process proceeds to S1124.

  In step S <b> 1122, the main CPU 401 uses the second reachable jackpot variable time table included in the variable time table set set in the RAM 403 as a use target from the variable time table set described with reference to FIG. 12. Set as a variable time table. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1130.

  In S1124, the main CPU 401 uses the second reachable big hit variable time table included in the variable time table set set in the main RAM 403 as a use target among the variable time table set described with reference to FIG. Set as a variable time table. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1130.

  In S1120, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a reach effect is to be performed, similar to S1118. If the main CPU 401 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (S1120: Yes), the process proceeds to S1126. If the main CPU 401 determines that the reach effect is not to be performed (S1120: No), the process proceeds to S1128.

  In step S1126, the main CPU 401 uses the variation time table for loss with second reach included in the variation time table set set in the main RAM 403 as a use target among the variation time table set described with reference to FIG. Set as a variable time table. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1130.

  In S1128, the main CPU 401 uses the second reachless variation time table included in the variable time table set set in the main RAM 403 as a use target among the time table sets described with reference to FIG. Set as a variable time table. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1130.

  In S1130, the main CPU 401 selects a special symbol variation time (variation pattern) with reference to the variation time table set in any of S1108 to S1114 and S1122 to S1128. Specifically, when the variation time table set in any one of S1108 to S1114 and S1122 to S1128 consists of only one variation time (see FIG. 12), the variation time is selected as a special symbol variation time (variation pattern). To do.

  In addition, the set fluctuation time table has a fluctuation time (30 seconds, 50 seconds, 60 seconds) for the first reach and jackpot fluctuation time table, the first reach and the loss fluctuation time table, the second reach and the jackpot In the case of the variation time table or the variation time table for loss with second reach, the special symbol variation time (variation pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern random number obtained together with the big hit random number obtained in S806 of FIG. , Select by lottery).

  In addition, when the set variation time table is the first reachless losing variation time table or the second non-reach losing variation time table in which the variation time is (12 seconds, 8 seconds, 4 seconds, 2 seconds), When the total number of holds of the number of holdings of the first special symbol lottery and the number of holdings of the second special symbol lottery is 0 or 1, 12 seconds is selected as the special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern), and the total number of holdings is 2 When the total number of holds is 3, select 4 seconds as the special symbol variation time. When the total number of reservations is 4 or more, select 2 seconds as the special symbol variation time. Select seconds.

  Furthermore, if the set variation time table is a variation time table for second reachless losing with a variation time (7 seconds, 3 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 0.5 seconds), the second special symbol lottery When the number of reserves is 0 or 1, select 7 seconds as the special symbol variation time (variation pattern). When the number of reserves is 2, select 3 seconds as the special symbol variation time. Selects 1.5 seconds as the special symbol variation time, and when the number of reservations is 4, selects 0.5 seconds as the special symbol variation time.

  In addition, when the set variation time table is the second reach-less variation variation time table whose variation time is (12 seconds, 2.5 seconds), when the number of second special symbol lottery hold is 0 or 1 Selects 12 seconds as the special symbol variation time (variation pattern), and when the number of reserves is 2 to 4, selects 2.5 seconds as the special symbol variation time.

  The variation pattern (special symbol variation time) selected in this way is set in the main RAM 403 as setting information. In S1130, when the variation time table with reach is set, the main CPU 401 determines to execute the reach effect in the effect symbol variation effect, and sets that in the main RAM 403 as setting information. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the special symbol process (S916: Fluctuation effect start command set) of FIG.

  Here, the description returns to the special symbol process of FIG. In S916 of FIG. 9, the main CPU 401 generates a changing effect start command including setting information set by the big hit determination process of S912 and the changing pattern selection process of S914, and sets it in the main RAM 403. The variation effect start command is a command for instructing the effect control unit 450 to start the effect symbol variation effect. Note that the variable effect start command set in S916 is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 of FIG.

  In S918, the main CPU 401 displays the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 104a or the second special symbol display device 104b based on the setting information included in the variation effect start command set in the processing of S916. To start. In S920, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time selected in the variation pattern selection process in S914 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation display in S918.

  If it is determined that the special symbol variation time has elapsed (S920: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S922, and if it is determined that the special symbol variation time has not elapsed (S920: No), the processing is performed. The process returns to the timer interrupt process (S708: normal symbol process) in FIG.

  In step S922, the main CPU 401 sets a change effect stop command for instructing the end of the effect symbol change effect by the image display unit 108 or the like in the main RAM 403. Note that the variable effect stop command set in S922 is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 of FIG.

  In S924, the main CPU 401 ends the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 104a or the second special symbol display device 104b started in the process of S918, and displays the stopped symbol. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is set in S1004 of the jackpot determination process of FIG. 10, in S924, the main CPU 401 displays the probability variation jackpot symbol corresponding to the set symbol among the probability variation jackpot symbols in the first special symbol display 104a. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 104b (see FIG. 3) is stopped and displayed.

  Similarly, when the normal jackpot symbol is set in S1006 of the jackpot determination process of FIG. 10, in S924, the main CPU 401 selects the normal jackpot symbol corresponding to the set symbol among the normal jackpot symbols as the first special symbol. The display is stopped and displayed on the display 104a (see FIG. 3). Further, when the lost symbol is set in S1008 of the big hit determination process of FIG. 10, in S924, the main CPU 401 displays the lost symbol as the first special symbol display 104a or the second special symbol display 104b (see FIG. 3). To stop display. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S926. In step S926, the main CPU 401 executes a suspension process.

<Processing during stop>
Based on FIG. 13, the stop process in S926 of FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the stop process, first, in S1300, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a big hit is determined in the big hit determination process in S912 of FIG. If the main CPU 401 determines that a big hit has occurred (S1300: Yes), the process proceeds to S1302. If the main CPU 401 determines that a big hit has not occurred (S1300: No), the process proceeds to S1310.

  In step S <b> 1302, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the probability variation flag stored in the main RAM 403 is set to “ON”. Here, when the probability variation flag is set to “OFF”, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is controlled with a normal probability of a low probability (1/265), and when the probability variation flag is set to “ON”, the special symbol lottery is controlled. Is a flag whose winning probability is controlled to a high probability (1/46). If the main CPU 401 determines that the probability variation flag is set to “ON” (S1302: Yes), it moves the process to S1304, and determines that the probability variation flag is set to “OFF” (S1302). : No), the process proceeds to S1306.

  In step S1304, the main CPU 401 updates the value of N stored in the main RAM 403 by adding 1, and then the process proceeds to step S1306. In S1306, the main CPU 401 receives an opening command including information for instructing the effect control unit 450 to start the jackpot game effect and information indicating the type of the jackpot game effect to be started (probability big hit game effect or normal jackpot game effect). Set in main RAM 403. Note that the opening command set in S1306 is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 of FIG.

  In S1308, the main CPU 401 starts the big hit game by setting the probability variation flag and the hourly flag stored in the main RAM 403 to OFF and setting the big hit game flag to ON. As a result, the first grand prize winning device 120 and the like are controlled to be released in the big prize winning device process which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, when the time reduction flag is set to “OFF”, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is controlled to a normal low probability, and the opening time of the electric tulip 126 when the normal symbol lottery is won is normally released momentarily. And control that does not shorten the execution interval of the special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, when “ON” is set, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is controlled with a high probability, and the opening time of the electric tulip 126 when the normal symbol lottery is won is controlled for a long time. Control to shorten the execution interval is performed. That is, the time reduction flag is a flag that is controlled to the time reduction state when set to “ON”.

  In step S <b> 1310, the main CPU 401 determines whether the value J stored in the main RAM 403 is “0”. Here, J is a value obtained by subtracting, from “100”, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the high accuracy / time reduction state or the low accuracy / time reduction state (ie, the time reduction state). When the main CPU 401 determines that the value of J is “0” (S1310: Yes), the main CPU 401 ends the special symbol processing, and the processing is the timer interrupt processing in FIG. 7 (S708: normal symbol processing). ), If it is determined that the value of J is not “0” (S1310: No), the process proceeds to S1312.

  In step S1312, the main CPU 401 rewrites the value of J stored in the main RAM 403 to a value obtained by subtracting one. In step S <b> 1314, the main CPU 401 determines whether the value of J stored in the main RAM 403 is “0”. If the main CPU 401 determines that the value of J is “0” (S1314: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S1316, and determines that the value of J is not “0” (S1314: No). The symbol processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (S708: normal symbol processing) in FIG.

  In step S1316, the main CPU 401 switches the time reduction flag stored in the main RAM 403 from ON to OFF, and then moves the process to step S1318. By the processing of S1310 to S1316 described above, the gaming state is switched from the low-accuracy / short-time state limited to 100 rotations started from the end of the set of 5 big hits described with reference to FIG. 5-2 to the normal state. .

  In step S1318, the main CPU 401 sets the normal state variable time table set described with reference to FIG. 12 in the main RAM 403 as the use target variable time table table set. The process during stop of S926 in FIG. 9 is completed, the special symbol process is also terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S708: normal symbol process) in FIG.

<Large winning device processing>
Based on FIG.14 and FIG.15, the big prize apparatus process in S710 of FIG. 7 is demonstrated. FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are flowcharts showing the contents of the big winning device process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the big winning device process, first, in S1400, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the gaming machine 100 is in the big hit game based on the flag information stored in the main RAM 403. If it is determined that the game is a big hit game (S1400: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S1402. S712: Return to the electric tulip process.

  In S1402, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the gaming machine 100 is opening a big hit game based on the information stored in the main RAM 403. If the main CPU 401 determines that the opening is being performed (S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404. If the main CPU 401 determines that the opening is not being performed (S1402: No), the process proceeds to S1420.

  In S1404, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a predetermined set opening time has elapsed since the opening command set in the process of S1306 in FIG. 13 is transmitted. If the main CPU 401 determines that the set opening time has elapsed (S1404: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. If the main CPU 401 determines that the set opening time has not elapsed (S1404: No), Since the opening has not ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S712: electric tulip process) in FIG.

  In S1406, the main CPU 401 sets the total number of rounds Rmax in the big hit game, the operation patterns of the first big winning device 120, the second big winning device 146, and the probability variation determining honey (V honey) 202, and the setting information. Set in main RAM 403. Specifically, the main CPU 401 sets operation patterns of the first big winning device 120, the second big winning device 146, and the V-hane 202 in the big hit game to be executed this time among the probability variation big hit game or the normal big hit game, After the setting information is set in the main RAM 403, the process proceeds to S1408.

  In S1408, the main CPU 401 resets the winning number C of game balls to the first grand prize winning device 120 (or the second grand prize winning device 146) stored in the main RAM 403 to “0”, and then the process goes to S1410. Move. In S1410, the main CPU 401 rewrites the round number R of the big hit game stored in the main RAM 403 to a value obtained by adding one.

  In S1412, the main CPU 401 starts the opening control of the first big prize device 120 or the second big prize device 146. Specifically, when the value of R stored in the main RAM 403 is 1 to 7, the first big winning device opening / closing unit 415 is controlled to start the opening control of the first big winning device 120, and the R value Is 8, the second grand prize-winning device opening / closing unit 417 is controlled to open the second grand prize-winning device 146. By this process, in the big hit game, the round is started and the opening operation of the first big winning device 120 (or the second big winning device 146) is started.

  In S1414, when the first big prize winning device 120 is released in S1412, the main CPU 401 uses the first big prize winning device release notification command to notify the effect control unit 450 of the opening start of the first big prize winning device 120. Set in RAM403.

  When the second big prize winning device 146 is released in S1412, the main CPU 401 sends a second big prize winning device release notification command to notify the effect control unit 450 of the opening start of the second big prize winning device 146. Then, the process proceeds to S1442. Note that the first big winning device release notification command or the second big winning device release notification command set in S1414 is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process of S716 in FIG.

  In S1420, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the gaming machine 100 is in the big hit game interval based on the information stored in the main RAM 403. If the main CPU 401 determines that it is during the interval (S1420: Yes), it moves the process to S1422. If it determines that it is not during the interval (S1420: No), it moves the process to S1424.

  In S <b> 1422, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the set interval time during the jackpot game set in the process of S <b> 1406 has elapsed since the first big winning device 120 was closed at the end of the previous round during the jackpot game. judge. If the main CPU 401 determines that the set interval time has elapsed (S1422: Yes), it is time to start the next round in the big hit game, so the process moves to S1408, and the set interval time has elapsed. If it is determined that it has not been made (S1420: No), it is not time to start the next round in the big hit game, so the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S712: electric tulip process) in FIG.

  In S1424, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the gaming machine 100 is executing a big hit game ending effect based on the information stored in the main RAM 403. If the main CPU 401 determines that the ending effect is being executed (S1424: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 in FIG. 15, and if it is determined that the ending effect is not being executed (S1442: No), the process is performed. The process moves to S1426.

  In S1426, the main CPU 401 determines that the gaming machine 100 is in the big hit game round, and from the time when the second big prize winning device 146 is released in S1412, the probability change confirmation area (V) set in the process of S1406. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (3 seconds in FIG. 5A) until the (region) 204 is opened has elapsed. If the main CPU 401 determines that the specified time has elapsed (S1426: Yes), the process proceeds to S1428. If the main CPU 401 determines that the specified time has not elapsed (S1426: No), the process proceeds to S1434.

  In step S <b> 1428, the main CPU 401 controls the probability variation confirmation region opening / closing unit (electric solenoid) 421 to start the opening control of the V region 204. By this process (in the case of a probable big hit game), the game ball that has entered the second big prize winning device 146 passes through the V region 204. In S1430, the main CPU 401 has passed the specified time (6 seconds in FIG. 5A) from when the V region 204 opening control is started in S1412 until the V region 204 set in the process of S1406 is closed. It is determined whether or not. If the main CPU 401 determines that the specified time has elapsed (S1430: Yes), it moves the process to S1432, and if it determines that the specified time has not elapsed (S1430: No), it moves the process to S1434.

  In step S1432, the main CPU 401 controls the probability change confirmation region opening / closing unit 421 to close the V region 204, and then the process proceeds to step S1434. In step S1434, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the V region switch 419 is turned on based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the V region switch 419. That is, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the V region 204. When the main CPU 401 determines that the game ball has passed through the V area 204 (S1434: Yes), the process proceeds to S1436, and when it is determined that the game ball has not passed (S1434: No), the process proceeds to S1438. .

In S1436, the main CPU 401 determines that the game ball has passed through the V region 204, and passes the probability change confirmation region (V region) passing command to notify the effect control unit 450 that the game ball has passed through the V region 204. Is set in the RAM 403, and the process proceeds to S1438. Note that the V region passing command set in S1436 is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output processing in S716 of FIG.

  In S <b> 1438, the main CPU 401 determines the first big prize device switch 414 (or the second big prize device switch 416) based on the presence / absence of a detection signal from the first big prize device switch 414 (or the second big prize device switch 416). ) Is turned on. When the main CPU 401 determines that the first grand prize winning device switch 414 (or the second big prize winning device switch 416) is turned on (S1438: Yes), the process proceeds to S1440, and when the main CPU 401 determines that the first prize winning device switch 414 is OFF. (S1438: No), the process proceeds to S1442.

  In S <b> 1440, the main CPU 401 determines that it has detected a winning of a game ball to the first big winning device switch 414 (or the second big winning device switch 416), and the number of winning game balls stored in the main RAM 403. Rewrite C to a value obtained by adding 1. The processing of S1440 is executed each time the first grand prize winning device switch 414 (or the second big prize winning device switch 416) is turned on, so that the first big prize winning device 120 (or the second largest prize winning device) during one round. The total number of game balls (winning number C) won in the winning device 146) is accumulated and stored in the main RAM 403. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1442.

  In S1442, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a specified opening control time has elapsed since the opening control of the first big winning device 120 (or the second big winning device 146) was started in the process of S1412. Specifically, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the opening control time of 29.5 seconds has elapsed for the first big winning device 120 (and the second big winning device 146) in the case of a probable big hit game. .

  On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot game, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the opening control time of 29.5 seconds has elapsed for the first big winning device 120, and for the second big winning device 146. It is determined whether or not the 0.1 second opening control time has elapsed. If the main CPU 401 determines that the specified opening control time has elapsed (S1442: Yes), it moves the process to S1446 and determines that the specified opening control time has not elapsed (S1442: No). The process moves to S1444.

  In S <b> 1444, the main CPU 401 determines that the number C of game balls won in the current round is the upper limit Cball number Cmax that defines the timing at which the first big prize device 120 (and the second big prize device 146) is closed. It is determined whether or not “9” in the form. If the main CPU 401 determines that C is Cmax (S1444: Yes), the process proceeds to S1446, and if it is determined that C is not Cmax (S1444: No), the process is performed by the timer illustrated in FIG. Return to the interrupt process (S712: electric tulip process).

  In S1446, when the first big winning device 120 is opened, the main CPU 401 controls the first big winning device opening / closing unit 415 and ends the opening control of the first big winning device 120 started in S1412. On the other hand, when the second big prize winning device 146 is opened, the second big prize winning device opening / closing unit 417 is controlled, and the opening control of the second big prize winning device 146 started in S1412 is ended. In other words, the large winning device opened in S1412 is closed and the current round is ended.

  In S <b> 1448, when the main CPU 401 releases the first big winning device 120 in S <b> 1446, the main CPU 401 sends a first big winning device closing notification command to the main RAM 403 to notify the effect control unit 450 of the closing of the first big winning device 120. When the second big prize winning device 146 is opened in S1412, a second big prize winning device closing notification command for notifying the effect control unit 450 of the closing of the second big prize winning device 146 is set in the main RAM 403. Note that the command set in S1448 is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output processing in S716 of FIG.

  In S1450, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the current round number R stored in the main RAM 403 has reached the maximum round number Rmax of the big hit game set in the process of S1406. If the main CPU 401 determines that R has reached Rmax (S1450: Yes), it moves the process to S1500 in FIG. 15, and determines that R has not reached Rmax (S1450: No). Is returned to the timer interrupt process (S712: electric tulip process) of FIG.

  In S1500 of FIG. 15, the main CPU 401 resets the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 403 to “0”. In step S <b> 1502, the main CPU 401 sets an ending command for instructing the effect control unit 450 to execute an ending effect in the main RAM 403. This command is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by S716 (output processing) in FIG. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1504.

  In S1504, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the set ending time set in the process of S1406 in FIG. 14 has elapsed since the ending command was set in the RAM 403 in S1502. If the main CPU 401 determines that the set ending time has elapsed (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1506. If the main CPU 401 determines that the set ending time has not elapsed (S1504: No), the process proceeds to FIG. Return to the timer interrupt process (S712: electric tulip process).

  In S1506, the main CPU 401 sets the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 403 to OFF, and after ending the jackpot game, the process proceeds to S1508. In S1508, the main CPU 401 executes a gaming state setting determination process.

<Game state setting process>
Based on FIG. 16, the gaming state setting process in S1508 of FIG. 15 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state setting process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the game state setting process, first, in S1600, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not one or more game balls have passed through the V region 204 in S1434 of FIG. 14 in the current big hit game. If the main CPU 401 determines that the passing of the V region 204 of the game ball is detected (S1600: Yes), the process proceeds to S1602, and if the passing is not detected (S1600: No), the process proceeds to S1610.

  In step S1602, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of N stored in the main RAM 403 is the upper limit number Nmax (that is, “5”). That is, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is the fifth jackpot of the set of five jackpots described with reference to FIG. If the main CPU 401 determines that it is the fifth big hit (S1602: Yes), it moves the process to S1612. If it determines that it is not the fifth big hit (S1602: No), it moves the process to S1604.

  In step S <b> 1604, the main CPU 401 sets the probability variation flag stored in the main RAM 403 to “ON”. In step S <b> 1606, the main CPU 401 sets the time reduction flag stored in the main RAM 403 to “ON”. By the processing of S1604 and S1606, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is controlled to the probability variation / short time state described with reference to FIG. 5-2 (that is, the gaming state in the set of 5 big hits).

  In step S1608, the main CPU 401 sets the high-accuracy / short-time state variation time table set described with reference to FIG. 12 as the target variation time table set in the main RAM 403, and then performs the processing of the timer interrupt process of FIG. Return to (S712: Electric Tulip Process).

  On the other hand, in S1610, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the game ended in S1506 in FIG. In other words, whether the game ball did not pass through the V area 204 despite being a probable big hit game (so-called puncture), or the game ball did not pass through the V area 204 because of a normal big hit game. Determine whether. If the main CPU 401 determines that the game is a probable big hit game (S1610: Yes), it moves the process to S1612. If it determines that it is not a probable big hit game (S1610: No), it moves the process to S1622.

  In step S <b> 1612, the main CPU 401 resets the value of N stored in the main RAM 403 to “0”. In step S <b> 1614, the main CPU 401 sets the probability variation flag stored in the main RAM 403 to “OFF”. In step S <b> 1616, the main CPU 401 sets the time reduction flag stored in the main RAM 403 to “ON”.

  In step S <b> 1618, the main CPU 401 sets the value of J stored in the main RAM 403 to “100”. In step S1620, the main CPU 401 sets the low-accuracy / short-time state variation time table set described with reference to FIG. 12 as the use-target variation time table set in the main RAM 403, and then executes the timer interrupt process of FIG. Return to (S712: Electric Tulip Process).

  On the other hand, in S1622, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of N stored in the main RAM 403 is “1” or more. In other words, whether or not the normal big hit game of this time is a normal big hit in the normal state, it is a normal big hit by winning the first starter 116 during the set of five big hits described using FIG. It is determined whether it is a thing. If the main CPU 401 determines that N is equal to or greater than “1” (S1622: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. If it is determined that N is not equal to or greater than “1” (S1622: No), the process proceeds to S1624. Move to.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 5-2, when the big hit is normally made by winning the first starter 116 during the big hit set of five times, the process proceeds from S <b> 1622 to S <b> 1612. The set of 5 big hits is completed, and a low accuracy / short time state limited to 100 revolutions is obtained. As a result, the player is relieved to some extent. If the game ball cannot pass through the V area 204 despite the probable big hit game, the process moves from S1610 to S1612, and as described with reference to FIG. At the end, it becomes a low probability / short time state limited to 100 rotations, and the player will be rescued to some extent.

  In step S1624, the main CPU 401 sets the normal state variation time table set described with reference to FIG. 12 as the target variation time table set in the main RAM 403, and then performs the timer interrupt process (S712: FIG. 7). Return to electric tulip treatment.

<Error handling on the main side>
Based on FIGS. 17 to 32, the abnormality process in S715 of FIG. 7 will be described. First, the process performed in the abnormal process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400.

  The main CPU 401 executes abnormal winning error processing shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 to be described later in S1700, executes dish full error processing shown in FIG. 20 to be described later in S1702, and shows in FIG. 21 to be described later in S1704. A door opening error process is executed, a payout state error process shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 described later is executed in S1706, a switch abnormality error process shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 described later is executed in S1708, and in S1710. 26, a magnet detection error process shown in FIG. 26 described later is executed. In S1712, a discharge error process shown in FIG. 27 described later is executed. In S1714, a radio wave detection error process shown in FIG. 28 described later is executed. Then, a discharge ball check error process shown in FIG. 29 to be described later is executed, and in S1718, The above-described solenoid photosensor abnormality error process shown in FIG. 30 is executed, an impact detection error process shown in FIG. 31 described later is executed in S1720, and an abnormal V prize error process shown in FIG. 32 described later is executed in S1722. .

<Main side abnormal winning error handling>
The abnormal winning error process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal winning error process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400, and FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the conditions for generating the abnormal winning error. First, referring to FIG. 18, in S1800, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not an abnormal winning error has occurred.

With reference to FIG. 19, here will be described the conditions for generating an abnormal winning error. As shown in FIG. 19, the abnormal winning error generation conditions are roughly classified into the following four types A to D.
A. B. Because a winning to the big winning device was detected when the big winning device was closed (except for the interval between rounds of big hits). In the case where there are two big winning devices, it is detected that a winning to the big winning device that should not be released during the big hit is detected. D. Because a winning to the winning device related to the ordinary electric accessory was detected when the ordinary electric accessory was not operated. Since unauthorized winning for various switches has been detected, each item of A to D will be specifically described in the light of the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment.

First, A will be described. The specific conditions for the occurrence of an abnormal winning error relating to A are as follows.
(A-1) A case where the first big prize winning device switch 414 is turned on when the first big prize winning device 120 as the special electric accessory is closed.
(A-2) Any of the second large prize winning device switch 416, the second big prize winning device discharge switch 418, and the V region (conditional device operation region) switch 419 when the second large winning device 146 as a special electric accessory is closed. When is turned on.

Next, B will be described. The specific abnormal winning error occurrence conditions related to B are as follows.
(B-1) Any of the second big prize device switch 416, the second big prize device discharge switch 418, and the V region (condition device operation region) switch 419 is turned on except during the eight rounds of the probability big hit or the normal big hit. If it becomes.
(B-2) A case where the first big winning device switch 414 is turned on during eight rounds of probability variation big hit or normal big hit.

Next, C will be described. The specific conditions for generating an abnormal winning error relating to C are as follows.
(C-1) When the second starter switch 411 is turned on when the electric tulip 126 (electric solenoid 412) as a normal electric accessory is not operated (closed state).

Next, D will be described. The specific conditions for the occurrence of an abnormal winning error relating to D are as follows.
(D-1) When the first starter switch 410 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(D-2) When the second starter switch 411 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(D-3) When the normal winning device switch 422 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(D-4) When the first grand prize winning device switch 414 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(D-5) When the second grand prize winning device switch 416 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(D-6) When the second grand prize winning device discharge switch 418 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(D-7) When the V region (conditional device operation region) switch 419 is turned on for 1 s or more.

  Returning to FIG. 18, when the main CPU 401 determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred (S1800: Yes), the process proceeds to S1802, and when it is determined that an abnormal winning error has not occurred (S1800: No), The process returns to the abnormal process (S1702: dish full error process) in FIG. In the determination process of S1800 (determination process of A, B, and C in FIG. 19), the time (time lag) from when the prize winning device or the ordinary electric accessory is closed until the game ball reaches various switches. Is determined in consideration of

  In S1802, the main CPU 401 sets an abnormal winning error start designation command in the main RAM 403 to notify the sub side that an abnormal winning error has occurred. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1804. The abnormal winning error start designation command set in S1802 is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7). Further, as will be described later, the production control unit 450 counts the number of transmitted abnormal winning error start designation commands, and determines an abnormal winning error notification mode based on the counted number of abnormal winning error start designation commands. It is supposed to be.

  In S1804, the main CPU 401 starts an external information output timer (0.4 seconds), moves the process to S1806, and an abnormal winning error has occurred from the game information output terminal board (external information terminal) 424 in S1806. A signal indicating that is output. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S1808.

  In step S1808, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the external information output timer has expired, that is, whether or not 0.4 seconds have elapsed since the external information output timer started. If the main CPU 401 determines that the external information output timer has passed 0.4 seconds (S1808: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S1810 and determines that the external information output timer has not passed 0.4 seconds. If it has been performed (S1808: No), the process is returned to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1702: dish full tank error process).

  In S1810, the main CPU 401 stops signal output from the game information output terminal board 424 based on the fact that the external information output timer has passed 0.4 seconds. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1702: dish full error process).

  That is, in the abnormal winning error process shown in FIG. 18, when an abnormal winning error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the abnormal winning error start designation command, and via the game information output terminal board 424. For a predetermined period (0.4 seconds).

  Note that the signal output from the game information output terminal plate 424 for 0.4 seconds is turned on for 200 ms and then turned off for 200 ms, and is repeated when there are multiple output triggers. (If a new abnormal winning error occurs within 0.4 seconds, another 0.4 seconds are output from that point).

  The abnormal winning error start designation command is set to “FE70H” composed of 1-byte CODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the command content (function). . When the CODE data is “FEH”, it indicates an error start designation command, and the DATA data is set according to the type of error. The error start designation command described later is also configured according to this.

<Main side dish full error processing>
Based on FIG. 20, the dish full tank error process in S1702 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the contents of the dish full error process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the dish full tank error process, first, in S2000, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the full tank flag is set to “ON” based on the flag information stored in the main RAM 403.

  Here, the full tank flag is set to “ON” when the lower plate 129 is filled with game balls and the plate full tank switch 423 is turned on, and the lower plate 129 is filled with game balls. It is a flag that is set to “OFF” when the dish full tank switch 423 is off. If the main CPU 401 determines that the full tank flag is set to “ON” (S2000: Yes), it moves the process to S2008, and determines that the full tank flag is set to “OFF” (S2000). : No), the process proceeds to S2002.

  In S2002, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the dish full tank switch 423 has been turned on. If it is determined that the dish full tank switch 423 has been turned on (S2002: Yes), the main CPU 401 determines that a dish full tank error has occurred. Is transferred to S2004, and when it is determined that the dish full tank switch 423 is not turned on (S2002: No), the processing is returned to the abnormal processing (S1704: door opening error processing) in FIG.

  In S2004, the main CPU 401 sets the full tank flag to “ON”, and moves the process to S2006. In S2006, the main RAM 403 sets a full dish error start designation command for notifying the sub side that a full dish error has occurred. To do. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S2008. The dish full tank error start designation command set in S2006 is set to “FE00H”, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  In S2008, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the dish full tank switch 423 has been turned off. If it is determined that the dish full tank switch 423 has been turned off (S2008: Yes), the main CPU 401 determines that the dish full tank error has ended. Is transferred to S2010, and when it is determined that the dish full tank switch 423 is not turned off (S2008: No), the processing is returned to the abnormal processing (S1704: door opening error processing) in FIG.

In S2010, the main CPU 401 sets the full tank flag to “OFF”, moves the process to S2012, and in S2012, sets a full dish error end designation command in the main RAM 403 to notify the sub side that the full dish error has ended. To do. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1704: door opening error process). Note that the dish full error end designation command set in S2012 is “FF00H”.
Is set and transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process of S716 (see FIG. 7). When the CODE data is “FFH”, an error end designation command is indicated, and an error end designation command to be described later is configured in accordance with this command.

  That is, in the dish full tank error process shown in FIG. 20, when a dish full tank error has occurred, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the dish full tank error start designation command, and when the dish full tank error has ended. This is notified from the main side to the sub side by a dish full error end designation command. In this dish full tank error process, when a dish full tank error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 424 is not performed.

<Main side door opening error handling>
Based on FIG. 21, the door opening error process in S1704 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the contents of the door opening error process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the door opening error process, first, in S2100, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the door opening flag is set to “ON” based on the flag information stored in the main RAM 403.

  Here, the door opening flag indicates that the door is opened and the door opening switch 483 is turned on (the glass frame 150 is opened and the glass frame opening switch 483a is turned on, or the inner frame 170 is opened. This flag is set to “ON” when the inner frame opening switch 483b is turned on, and is set to “OFF” when the door is not opened and the door opening switch 483 is turned off. If the main CPU 401 determines that the door opening flag is set to “ON” (S2100: Yes), it moves the process to S2108 and determines that the door opening flag is set to “OFF”. (S2100: No), the process proceeds to S2102.

  In S2102, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the door opening switch 483 has been turned on. If it is determined that the door opening switch 483 has been turned on (S2102: Yes), the main CPU 401 determines that a door opening error has occurred and performs processing in S2104. If it is determined that the door opening switch 483 is not turned on (S2102: No), the process returns to the abnormal process (S1706: payout state error process) in FIG.

  In step S2104, the main CPU 401 sets the door opening flag to “ON”, and the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, the main RAM 403 transmits a door opening error start designation command that notifies the sub side that a door opening error has occurred. set. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S2108. Note that the door opening error start designation command set in S2106 is set to “FE01H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  In step S2108, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the door opening switch 483 has been turned off. If the main CPU 401 determines that the door opening switch 483 has been turned off (S2108: Yes), the main CPU 401 determines that the door opening error has ended and performs processing in step S2110. If it is determined that the door opening switch 483 has not been turned off (S2108: No), the process returns to the abnormal process of FIG. 17 (S1706: payout state error process).

  In step S2110, the main CPU 401 sets the door opening flag to “OFF”, and moves the process to step S2112. In step S2112, the main CPU 403 transmits a door opening error end designation command to the main RAM 403 to notify the sub side that the door opening error has ended. set. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the abnormal process of FIG. 17 (S1706: payout state error process). Note that the door opening error end designation command set in S2112 is set to “FF01H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  That is, in the door opening error process shown in FIG. 21, when a door opening error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the door opening error start designation command, and the door opening error ends. This is notified from the main side to the sub side by a door opening error end designation command. In this door opening error processing, when a door opening error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 424 is not performed.

<Mainly payout status error processing>
Based on FIGS. 22 and 23, the payout state error process in S1706 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the contents of the payout state error process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400, and FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the occurrence conditions of the payout state error. First, referring to FIG. 22, in S2200, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the payout error flag is set to “ON” based on the flag information stored in the main RAM 403.

  Here, the payout error flag is a flag that is set to “ON” when a payout state error has occurred and is set to “OFF” when a payout state error has not occurred. If the main CPU 401 determines that the payout error flag is set to “ON” (S2200: Yes), it moves the process to S2208 and determines that the payout error flag is set to “OFF”. (S2200: No), the process proceeds to S2202. In step S2202, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not a payout state error has occurred.

With reference to FIG. 23, here will be described the conditions for occurrence of the payout state error. As shown in FIG. 23, the occurrence conditions of the payout state error are roughly classified into the following five types A to E.
A. B. Counter case error due to ball catching or clogging of payout drive unit (payout motor) Discharge ball counting switch error C. No sphere error Payout excess error E. Issue command error
Hereinafter, each item of A to E will be specifically described in the light of the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment.

First, A will be described. There are two specific conditions for occurrence of a payout state error relating to A as follows.
(A-1) When the rotor rotation switch 447 is turned off when the payout motor 444 is driven (a ball biting error in which the rotor cannot rotate due to the ball biting in the counter case).
(A-2) When the payout ball counting switch 446 is turned off when the rotor rotation switch 447 is turned on (a clogging error in which the payout ball cannot be detected even though the rotor in the counter case has normally rotated).

Next, B will be described. The specific occurrence condition of the payout state error relating to B is as follows.
(B-1) A case where an abnormality such as a disconnection (not connected) or a short circuit occurs in the payout ball counting switch 446 and a switch abnormality detection signal is input to the main control unit 400.

Next, C will be described. The specific occurrence condition of the payout state error relating to C is as follows.
(C-1) A case where there is no game ball to be paid out (deficiency) and the ballless switch 445 is turned on.

Next, D will be described. There are two specific conditions for generating a payout state error relating to D as follows.
(D-1) When the number of payout balls is counted more than the expected payout ball count by the payout ball count switch 446.
(D-2) Chattering of the payout ball counting switch 446 (for example, 10 times or more)
Next, E will be described. The specific occurrence condition of the payout state error relating to E is as follows.
(E-1) A communication error (missing of a payout command in the payout control unit 440, reception of abnormal data, etc.) occurs between the payout control unit 440 and the main control unit 400.

  Returning to FIG. 22, if the main CPU 401 determines that a payout state error has occurred (S2202: Yes), it moves the process to S2204, and determines that a payout state error has not occurred (S2202: No). The process returns to the abnormality process (S1708: switch abnormality error process) in FIG.

  In S2204, the main CPU 401 sets the payout error flag to “ON”, and moves the process to S2206. In S2206, the main CPU 403 issues a payout state error start designation command for notifying the sub-side that a payout state error has occurred. set. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S2208. Note that the payout state error start designation command set in S2206 is set to “FE02H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  In S2208, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the payout state error has been resolved and has ended. If it is determined that the payout state error has ended (S2208: Yes), the process proceeds to S2210, and the payout state error ends. If it is determined that it has not been performed (S2208: No), the process returns to the abnormality process of FIG.

  In S 2210, the main CPU 401 sets the payout error flag to “OFF”, moves the process to S 2212, and in S 2212, issues a payout state error end designation command to the main RAM 403 to notify the sub side that the payout state error has ended. set. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1708: switch abnormality error process). Note that the payout state error end designation command set in S2212 is set to “FF02H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  That is, in the payout state error process shown in FIG. 22, when a payout state error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by a payout state error start designation command, and the payout state error ends. This is notified from the main side to the sub side by a payout state error end designation command. In this payout state error process, when a payout state error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 424 is not performed.

<Main switch error error processing>
Based on FIGS. 24 and 25, the switch abnormality error processing in S1708 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the contents of the switch abnormality error processing performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the occurrence conditions of the switch abnormality error. First, referring to FIG. 24, in S <b> 2400, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the switch abnormality flag is set to “ON” based on the flag information stored in the main RAM 403.

  Here, the switch abnormality flag is a flag that is set to “ON” when a switch abnormality error has occurred and is set to “OFF” when a switch abnormality error has not occurred. If the main CPU 401 determines that the switch abnormality flag is set to “ON” (S2400: Yes), it moves the process to S2408 and determines that the switch abnormality flag is set to “OFF”. (S2400: No), the process proceeds to S2402. In step S2402, the main CPU 401 determines whether a switch abnormality error has occurred.

  With reference to FIG. 25, the occurrence condition of the switch abnormality error will be described here. As shown in FIG. 25, the occurrence condition of the switch abnormality error is roughly divided into the following four types A to D.

A. Input switch error B. Abnormal error without magnetic sensor only V region photo sensor only No abnormal error No impact sensor only error Hereinafter, each of items A to D will be described in detail with reference to the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment.

First, A will be described. A specific switch abnormality error occurrence condition related to A is as follows.
(A-1) The first starter switch 410, the second starter switch 411, the normal symbol operation gate switch 413, the first big prize device switch 414, the second big prize device switch 416, the second big prize device discharge switch 418 , V region switch 419, normal winning device switch 422, dish full switch 423, frame count switch 429, ball-free switch 445, payout ball count switch 446, rotor rotation switch 447, door opening switch 483 (glass frame opening switch 483a, When an abnormality such as a disconnection (not connected) or a short circuit occurs in the inner frame opening switch 483b), and a switch abnormality detection signal is input to the main control unit 400. Note that the switch abnormality detection signals of the ballless switch 445, the payout ball counting switch 446, the rotor rotation switch 447, and the door opening switch 483 are input to the main control unit 400 via the payout control unit 440 (see FIG. 4A). ).

Next, B will be described. A specific switch abnormality error occurrence condition relating to B is as follows.
(B-1) When the magnetic sensor 426 is turned on for 1 second.

Next, C will be described. The specific occurrence condition of the payout state error relating to C is as follows.
(C-1) When the V region photosensor 420 is turned on for 10 seconds when the V region opening / closing part (electric solenoid) 421 is off (when the V region 204 is closed).

Next, D will be described. A specific switch abnormality error occurrence condition related to D is as follows.
(D-1) When the impact sensor 428 is turned on for 20 seconds when the door opening switch 483 is turned off (when the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are closed).

  Returning to FIG. 24, when the main CPU 401 determines that a switch abnormality error has occurred (S2402: Yes), the process proceeds to S2404, and when it is determined that a switch abnormality error has not occurred (S2402: No), The process returns to the abnormality process (S1710: magnet detection error process) in FIG.

  In S2404, the main CPU 401 sets the switch abnormality flag to “ON”, and moves the process to S2406. In S2406, the main CPU 403 sends a switch abnormality error start designation command to notify the sub side that a switch abnormality error has occurred in the main RAM 403. set. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S2408. The switch abnormality error start designation command set in S2406 is set to “FE03H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  In S2408, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the switch abnormality error has been resolved and the process has ended. If it is determined that the switch abnormality error has ended (S2408: Yes), the process proceeds to S2410, and the switch abnormality error ends. If it is determined that it has not been performed (S2408: No), the process returns to the abnormality process (S1710: magnet detection error process) in FIG.

  In S2410, the main CPU 401 sets the switch abnormality flag to “OFF”, and moves the process to S2412. In S2412, the main CPU 403 sends a switch abnormality error end designation command to notify the sub side that the switch abnormality error has ended. set. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1710: magnet detection error process). Note that the payout state error end designation command set in S2412 is set to “FF03H”, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  In other words, in the switch abnormality error processing shown in FIG. 24, when a switch abnormality error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by a switch abnormality error start designation command, and the switch abnormality error ends. This is notified from the main side to the sub side by a switch abnormal error end designation command. In this switch abnormality error processing, when a switch abnormality error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 424 is not performed.

<Main side magnet detection error handling>
Based on FIG. 26, the magnet detection error process in S1710 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the magnet detection error process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the magnet detection error process, first, in S2600, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the magnetic sensor 426 is turned on and a magnetic detection signal is input for 500 ms. If the main CPU 401 determines that a magnetic detection signal has been input for 500 ms (S2600: Yes), the main CPU 401 proceeds to S2602 assuming that a magnet detection error has occurred, and determines that the magnetic detection signal has not been input for 500 ms ( S2600: No), the process is returned to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1712: discharge error process).

  In step S2602, the main CPU 401 sets a magnet detection error start designation command in the main RAM 403 to notify the sub side that a magnet detection error has occurred. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S2604. The magnet detection error start designation command set in S2602 is set to “FE04H”, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  In S2604, the main CPU 401 starts an external information output timer (300 seconds), moves the processing to S2606, and indicates that a magnet detection error has occurred from the game information output terminal board (external information terminal) 424 in S2606. Output a signal. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S2608.

  In step S2608, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the external information output timer has expired, that is, whether or not 300 seconds have elapsed since the external information output timer started. If the main CPU 401 determines that the external information output timer has passed 300 seconds (S2608: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S2610, and determines that the external information output timer has not passed 300 seconds (S2608). : No), the process is returned to the abnormality process (S1712: discharge error process) of FIG.

  In S2610, the main CPU 401 stops the signal output from the game information output terminal board 424 based on the fact that the external information output timer has elapsed for 300 seconds. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the abnormality process (S1712: discharge error process) of FIG.

  That is, in the magnet detection error processing shown in FIG. 26, when a magnet detection error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the magnet detection error start designation command, and via the game information output terminal plate 424. Thus, the information is output (output) to the outside for a predetermined period (300 seconds).

  The signal output from the game information output terminal plate 424 for 300 seconds is turned on for 200 ms and then turned off for 200 ms. When there are multiple output triggers, the signal is repeated (300 If a new magnet detection error occurs within 2 seconds, another 300 seconds are output from that point).

<Ejection error handling on the main side>
Based on FIG. 27, the discharge error processing in S1712 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the discharge error process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the discharge error processing, first, in S2700, the main CPU 401 detects a winning ball that has won a winning ball in each winning device, that is, a first starting device switch 410 that pays out a winning ball by detecting a gaming ball, a second starting device. It is determined whether the switch 411, the first big prize device switch 414, the second big prize device discharge switch 418, and the normal prize device switch 422 are turned on. If the main CPU 401 determines that any of the winning switches has been turned on (S2700: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S2702, and determines that none of the winning switches has been turned on (S2700: No), the process proceeds to S2704.

  In step S2702, the main CPU 401 increments the winning counter NC provided in the main RAM 403 in response to turning on of each winning switch. In other words, the winning counter NC is a counter for counting the total number of game balls (safe balls) won in each winning device, which is incremented by +1 every time one of the winning switches is turned on.

  In S2704, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the frame count switch 429 for collectively counting the game balls won in each winning device is turned on. If the main CPU 401 determines that the frame count switch 429 has been turned on (S2704: Yes), the process proceeds to S2706, and if the main CPU 401 determines that the frame count switch 429 has not been turned on (S2704: No). The process moves to S2708.

  In step S <b> 2706, the main CPU 401 increments the frame counter WC provided in the main RAM 403 by 1 when the frame count switch 429 is turned on. In other words, the frame counter WC is a counter for counting the total number of game balls (safe balls) won in each winning device, which is incremented by +1 every time the frame count switch 429 is turned on.

  In S2708, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the absolute value of the difference between the count value of the winning counter NC and the count value of the frame counter WC is 50 or more. If the main CPU 401 determines that the absolute value of the difference is 50 or more (S2708: Yes), it moves to S2710 assuming that a discharge error has occurred, and determines that the absolute value of the difference is less than 50. (S2708: No), the process is returned to the abnormality process (S1714: radio wave detection error process) of FIG.

  In step S <b> 2710, the main CPU 401 sets a discharge error start designation command for notifying the sub side that a discharge error has occurred in the main RAM 403. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 shifts the processing to S2712. Note that the discharge error start designation command set in S2710 is set to “FE05H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  In S2712, the main CPU 401 outputs a signal indicating that a discharge error has occurred from the game information output terminal board (external information terminal) 424. Here, a signal output from the gaming information output terminal board 424 indicating that the discharge error has occurred is stored in the main RAM 403 by turning on the RAM clear switch 405 when the gaming machine 100 is turned on. Is continuously output until Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the abnormality process (S1714: radio wave detection error process) in FIG.

  That is, in the discharge error processing shown in FIG. 27, when the difference (absolute value) between the count value of the winning counter NC and the count value of the frame counter WC, which should be the same value, is 50 or more. In the event that a discharge error has occurred, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by a discharge error start designation command, and until the next storage of the main RAM 403 is cleared via the game information output terminal board 424, Notification (output) is made to the outside.

<Main-side radio wave detection error handling>
Based on FIG. 28, the radio wave detection error process in S1714 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of radio wave detection error processing performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the radio wave detection error process, first, in S2800, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the radio wave sensor 427 is turned on and a radio wave detection signal is input. If the main CPU 401 determines that a radio wave detection signal has been input (S2800: Yes), the process proceeds to S2802 assuming that a radio wave detection error has occurred, and if the main CPU 401 determines that no radio wave detection signal has been input (S2800: No), the process is returned to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1716: discharged ball confirmation error process).

  In step S2802, the main CPU 401 sets, in the main RAM 403, a radio wave detection error start designation command that notifies the sub side that a radio wave detection error has occurred. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1716: discharged ball check error process). Note that the radio wave detection error start designation command set in S2802 is set to “FE06H”, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  That is, in the radio wave detection error process shown in FIG. 28, when a radio wave detection error occurs, a notification to that effect is sent from the main side to the sub side by a radio wave detection error start designation command. In this radio wave detection error processing, when a radio wave detection error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 424 is not performed.

<Main ball discharge error check>
Based on FIG. 29, the discharge ball check error process in S1716 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the contents of the discharged ball check error process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the discharged ball check error process, first, in S2900, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the game ball discharged from the second big prize winning device 146 is excessively discharged or insufficiently discharged.

  Here, excessive discharge or insufficient discharge of game balls in the second grand prize winning device 146 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, in the second grand prize winning device 146, the path from the game ball entering to being discharged is long, and there are devices such as the V honey 202 in the meantime. Compared to the above, abnormalities such as clogging are more likely to occur.

  Accordingly, when the game ball that has entered the ball is clogged in the second grand prize winning device 146 when the second big prize winning device 146 is opened, the second big prize winning device 146 detected by the second big prize winning device switch 416 is used. There is an insufficient discharge error in which the number of balls discharged from the second big prize winning device 146 detected by the second big prize winning device discharge switch 418 is smaller than the number of balls entered into the second big prize winning device 146. When the ball clogging of the second big prize winning device 146 is detected, the second big prize winning device 146 detected by the second big prize winning device discharge switch 418 is more than the number of balls entered into the second big prize winning device 146 detected by the second big prize winning device switch 416. An excessive discharge error occurs in which the number of balls discharged from the vehicle increases.

  If the main CPU 401 determines that the game balls discharged from the second grand prize winning device 146 are excessively discharged or insufficiently discharged (S2900: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S2906 and determines that a discharged ball confirmation error has occurred, and discharges it. If it is determined that there is neither excess nor insufficient discharge (S2900: No), the process proceeds to S2902.

  In S2902, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not there is a discharge ball when the second large winning device 146 (electric solenoid 417) is not operated, that is, the second large winning device discharge switch in a state where the right honey 200 is not opened. It is determined whether 418 has detected a discharge ball. In the determination process of S2902, the determination is made in consideration of the time (time lag) from when the right honey 200 is closed until the game ball reaches the second big prize device discharge switch 418.

  If the main CPU 401 determines that there is a discharge ball when the second grand prize winning device 146 is not in operation (S2902: Yes), the main CPU 401 moves the process to S2906 and determines that there is no discharge ball because an discharge ball check error has occurred. If so (S2902: No), the process proceeds to S2904.

  In S2904, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V region (conditional device operation region) 204 when the second grand prize winning device 146 is not operated, that is, in the state where the right honey 200 is not opened. It is determined whether the switch 419 is turned on. In the determination process of S2904, the determination is made in consideration of the time (time lag) from when the right honey 200 is closed until the game ball reaches the V region switch 419.

  If the main CPU 401 determines that it has passed the V area 204 when the second prize-winning device 146 is not operating (S2904: Yes), the process proceeds to S2906, assuming that a discharge ball confirmation error has occurred, and passes the V area 204. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (S2904: No), the process returns to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1718: solenoid photosensor abnormality error process).

  In step S <b> 2906, the main CPU 401 sets a discharge ball check error start designation command in the main RAM 403 to notify the sub side that a discharge ball check error has occurred. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1718: solenoid photosensor abnormality error process). Note that the discharge ball check error start designation command set in S2906 is set to “FE07H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  That is, in the discharge ball check error processing shown in FIG. 29, when a discharge ball check error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by a discharge ball check error start designation command. In this discharge ball check error process, when a discharge ball check error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal plate 424 is not performed.

<Main side solenoid photosensor error error processing>
Based on FIG. 30, the solenoid photosensor abnormality error process in S1718 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of solenoid photosensor abnormality error processing performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the solenoid photosensor abnormality error process, first, in S3000, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the V-region photosensor 420 is ON for 1200 ms when the V honeycomb 202 (electric solenoid 421) is not operated, that is, the V honeycomb 202 is not operated. Thus, when the V area 202 is closed in the V area 204, it is determined whether or not the V area photosensor 420 has detected a state in which a game ball can pass through the V area 204 for 1200 ms.

  When the main CPU 401 determines that the V-area photosensor 420 has been turned ON for 1200 ms (S3000: Yes), that is, the game ball passes through the V-area 204 even though the V-area 204 is blocked by the V-female 202. If the V region photosensor 420 detects the enabled state for 1200 ms, the process proceeds to S3004 on the assumption that a solenoid photosensor abnormality error has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 401 determines that the V area photosensor 420 is not 1200 ms ON (S3000: No), that is, since the V area 204 is blocked by the V honey 202, the game ball passes through the V area 204. If the V-area photosensor 420 cannot detect 1200 ms for the passable state, the process proceeds to S3002.

  In S3002, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the V area photosensor 420 is turned ON for 20 ms or more when the V honey 202 (electric solenoid 421) is operated, that is, the V honey 202 is operated and the V area 204 is moved to the V honey 202. Is open, it is determined whether or not the V region photosensor 420 detects a state in which the game ball can pass through the V region 204 for 20 ms or more.

  When the main CPU 401 determines that the V-area photosensor 420 has been turned ON for 20 ms or longer (S3002: Yes), that is, the V ball 202 is open in the V area 204, so that the game ball can pass through the V area 204. When the V region photosensor 420 detects 20 ms or longer, the process returns to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1720: impact detection error process).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 401 determines that the V region photosensor 420 has not been turned ON for 20 ms or longer (S3002: No), that is, the V region 204 is open even though the V honey 202 is open. If the V-region photosensor 420 cannot detect a state where the game ball can pass through 204 for 20 ms or longer, the process proceeds to S3004 assuming that a solenoid photosensor abnormality error has occurred.

  In step S <b> 3004, the main CPU 401 sets a solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command in the main RAM 403 to notify the sub side that a solenoid photosensor abnormality error has occurred. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the process to the abnormality process of FIG. 17 (S1720: shock detection error process). The discharged ball check error start designation command set in S3004 is set to “FE08H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  That is, in the solenoid photosensor abnormality error process shown in FIG. 30, when a solenoid photosensor abnormality error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by a solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command. ing. In this solenoid photosensor abnormality error processing, when a solenoid photosensor abnormality error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal plate 424 is not performed.

<Main side impact detection error handling>
Based on FIG. 31, the impact detection error process in S1720 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the details of the impact detection error process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the impact detection error process, first, in S3100, it is determined whether or not the door opening switch 483 (the glass frame opening switch 483a or the inner frame opening switch 483b) is turned on, and it is determined that the door opening switch 483 is turned on. In the case (S3100: Yes), the processing is returned to the abnormal processing in FIG. 17 (S1722: abnormal V winning error processing), and when it is determined that the door opening switch 483 is not turned on (S3100: No), the processing is changed to S3102. Move.

  In S3102, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the second big prize device 146 (electric solenoid 417) is in operation, that is, whether or not the right honeycomb 200 is in the opening operation, and the second big prize device 146 is in operation. If it is determined (S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to S3104, and if it is determined that the second big prize winning device 146 is not in operation (S3102: No), the process is illustrated in FIG. 17 as an abnormal process (S1722: abnormal V). Return to winning error processing.

  In step S3104, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the impact sensor 428 is turned on and an impact detection signal is input for 32 ms. If the main CPU 401 determines that an impact detection signal has been input for 32 ms (S3104: Yes), it determines that an impact detection error has occurred and moves the process to S3106. That is, it is determined that an impact detection error has occurred when the impact sensor 428 is turned ON for 32 ms during the operation of the second big prize device 146 when the door (the glass frame 150 or the inner frame 170) of the gaming machine 100 is closed.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 401 determines in S3104 that the impact detection signal has not been input for 32 ms (S3104: No), the process returns to the abnormal process in FIG. 17 (S1716: S1722: abnormal V prize error process).

  In step S <b> 3106, the main CPU 401 sets an impact detection error start designation command in the main RAM 403 that notifies the sub side that an impact detection error has occurred. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 returns the processing to the abnormal processing of FIG. 17 (S1716: S1722: abnormal V winning error processing). Note that the impact detection error start designation command set in S3106 is set to “FE09H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  That is, in the impact detection error process shown in FIG. 31, when an impact detection error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by an impact detection error start designation command. In the impact detection error processing, when an impact detection error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 424 is not performed.

<Main side abnormal V winning error handling>
Based on FIG. 32, the abnormal V winning error process in S1722 of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal V winning error process performed by the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400. In the abnormal V winning error process, first, in S3200, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a big hit gaming state, and if it is determined that the big hit gaming state is set (S3200: Yes), the abnormal process of FIG. The process is returned to the timer interrupt process (S716: output process) in FIG. 7, and when it is determined that the big hit gaming state has not been reached (S3200: No), the process proceeds to S3202.

  In S3202, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V region (conditional device operation region) 204, that is, whether or not the V region switch 419 is turned on, and if the V region switch 419 is turned on. If it is determined (S3202: Yes), it is determined that an abnormal V winning error has occurred, and the process proceeds to S3204. If it is determined that the V region switch 419 has not been turned on (S3202: No), the abnormality process of FIG. The process returns to the timer interrupt process (S716: output process) in FIG.

  In S 3204, the main CPU 401 sets an abnormal V prize error start designation command (a lamp full extinction (except for the fourth symbol) start designation command) for notifying the sub side that an abnormal V prize error has occurred in the main RAM 403. Thus, the abnormal V winning error process of S1722 in FIG. 17 ends, the abnormal process also ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S716: output process) of FIG. The abnormal V winning error start designation command set in S3204 is set to “FE72H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 450 by the output process in S716 (see FIG. 7).

  That is, in the abnormal V prize error process shown in FIG. 32, when an abnormal V prize error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by an abnormal V prize error start designation command. In this abnormal V winning error process, when an abnormal V winning error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal plate 424 is not performed.

Above, description of the timer interruption process performed by main CPU401 of the main control part 400 is complete | finished.
<Main processing of production control unit 450>
Next, main processing executed by the sub CPU 451 in the effect control unit 450 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450.

  Referring to FIG. 33, when power supply to gaming machine 100 is started (power is turned on when RAM clear switch 405 is turned on or power is restored without turning on RAM clear switch 405), sub CPU 451 In step S3300, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 452, and a flag stored in the sub RAM 453 is initialized and set. Further, in S3300, the sub CPU 451 initializes each unit such as a notification device (liquid crystal display device, lamp, LED, audio device), input hodan, gimmick, etc., and moves the process to S3302. The processing for initializing each unit will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  In step S3302, the sub CPU 451 determines whether a RAM clear preparation command has been received from the main control unit 400 (see step S602 in FIG. 6). If it is determined that the RAM clear preparation command has been received (S3302: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S3304, and executes the process when the RAM clear preparation command is received for each unit. Note that processing upon receipt of a RAM clear preparation command for each unit will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  When the process of S3304 is completed, the process proceeds to S3306, and the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a power-on command has been received from the main control unit 400 (see S608 in FIG. 6). If it is determined that the power-on command has not been received (S3306: No), the sub CPU 451 receives this power-on command, that is, until the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on. Repeat the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3306 that a power-on command has been received (S3306: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S3308 and executes the process at the time of power-on command reception for each unit. To do. The processing at the time of power-on command reception for each unit will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. When the process of S3308 is finished, the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S3314.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3302 that the RAM clear preparation command has not been received (S3302: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S3310 and determines whether or not a power recovery command has been received (FIG. 6 S620). If it is determined that the power recovery command has not been received (S3310: No), the sub CPU 451 returns the process to S3302. That is, in this main process, the sub CPU 451 repeatedly executes the processes of S3302 and S3310 until receiving either the RAM clear preparation command or the power recovery command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3310 that the power recovery command has been received (S3310: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S3312, and executes the processing when the power recovery command is received for each unit. To do. The processing at the time of power recovery command reception for each unit will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. When the processing of S3312 is completed, the sub CPU 451 moves the processing to S3314.

  In step S3314, the sub CPU 451 performs an effect random number update process. That is, the sub CPU 451 performs processing for updating the random number related to the effect stored in the sub RAM 453. Thereafter, the process of step S3314 is repeatedly executed until a predetermined interrupt process is performed. Note that the processing may be stopped until the next interrupt processing is performed without performing the processing of S3314 (HALT instruction).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39, specific processing contents performed in each unit when the power is turned on and when the power is restored will be described. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of processing related to a notification device or the like when power is turned on and when power is restored, and FIG. 35 shows the main display device 108 when the effect control unit 450 receives a RAM clear preparation command. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a RAM clear preparation screen displayed in FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of processing related to input buttons and the like at power-on and power-on, and FIG. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of processing related to a gimmick at the time of power-on and power-up, and FIG. 38 is a time chart showing an example of a gimmick operation at the time of power-on and power-up. FIG. 39 is a time chart showing an example of an operation sequence of one set of gimmick when power is turned on and when power is restored.

  Referring to FIG. 34, first, the contents of processing related to a notification device or the like when power is turned on and when power is restored will be described. The period from when the power supply to the gaming machine 100 is started until the effect control unit 450 receives either the RAM clear preparation command or the power recovery command, the following notification device (main liquid crystal, sub liquid crystal, The lamp, voice, and external information terminal) perform the following power-on processing (command wait) as follows.

Main liquid crystal (main display device 108, the same applies below): Color bar display (version display, etc.)
Sub liquid crystal (sub display device 107, the same applies below): Color bar display Lamp: Panel lamp (panel lamp 110, the same applies below) White blinking (250 ms switching repeat), special symbol and normal symbol related LED (first, second) Special symbol display 104a, 104b, normal symbol display 104e, first and second special symbol hold indicator 104c, 104d, normal symbol hold indicator 104f, and so on) off, fourth symbol indicator (first, first 2 identification indicator 106a, second identification indicator 106b, the same applies to the following: gimmick (retractable 137, air vibrator (vibrator motor 493 and air delivery fan 494), patrol lamp motor) before power-on command or power-return command reception 482, chance button motor 474, board gimmick 109, and so on) Is completed, the frame lamp (upper frame lamp 140, frame decoration lamp 141, and so on) and the panel lamp are all lit (brightness, illuminance, etc. about 30%)
・ Voice: Sounds a start-up sound ・ External information terminal (game information output terminal board 424, the same applies hereinafter): No processing Further, in the notification device or the like, when the production control unit 450 receives the RAM clear preparation command, the power is turned on. During the period until the command is received, the following processing when the RAM clear preparation command is received is performed.

-Main liquid crystal: RAM clear preparation message is displayed-Sub liquid crystal: Red display-Lamp: Continue the above, but if there is no command from the corresponding main control unit 400 and there is an unused status display LED, the corresponding Turn on the LED until the command is received when the power is turned on. • Voice: Sounds the RAM clear preparation sound until the power-on command is received ("RAM clear is being prepared" + siren 10 seconds + Please ”+ siren 10 seconds (repeated), do not sound other than RAM clear preparation sound, volume is sounded by MAX (volume switch 465 and software volume setting values are not required))
・ External information terminal: No processing <About abnormality related information (reference time)>
Here, the display contents of the RAM clear preparation message performed on the main liquid crystal will be described with reference to FIG. When the effect control unit 450 receives a RAM clear preparation command from the main control unit 400, as shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B, the screen of the main liquid crystal (main display device 108) displays “RAM clear preparation in progress”. Is displayed in a large size, and below it is displayed the text "Please press the RWM erase switch again". The voice processing described above is repeated according to this display, that is, after the power is turned on, until the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on again and a power-on command is received.

  Furthermore, under the message “Please press the RWM erase switch again”, the “cursor button” (production key 144) mark and the characters “abnormal winning frequency error” “setting 1 setting 2” are displayed small. Yes. The processing content of the “Winning Frequency Abnormal Error” will be described in detail later. In short, it is a process of determining whether or not the winning frequency of a game ball to a predetermined winning device is abnormal, “Setting 1 Setting 2” is for setting a determination criterion (in this case, a reference time) for determining abnormality in the winning frequency.

  Here, for example, 20 seconds is set as the reference time in setting 1 and 80 seconds is set as the reference time in setting 2, for example, and the winning frequency is selected by selecting the desired hole. A reference time is set as a determination reference in the abnormality determination. Note that the selection of this determination criterion is performed by operating the left and right cursor buttons of the effect key 144.

  Furthermore, the selected and set reference time is stored as abnormality related information in the abnormality related information storage area of the sub-RAM 453 and backed up by backup means. On the main liquid crystal screen when the RAM clear preparation command is received when the power is turned on, the selection item corresponding to the previously set reference time is initially selected (“Setting” in FIG. 35A). (2) and (B) show that “Setting 1” is initially selected).

  FIG. 35 (A) shows a RAM clear preparation screen when the non-volatile memory FeRAM is not used as backup means (backing up by a backup power supply), and FIG. 35 (B) is non-volatile as backup means. 6 shows a RAM clear preparation screen in the case of using FeRAM as a volatile memory. As shown in the figure, in the RAM clear preparation screen shown in FIG. 35 (B) using FeRAM, “chance button” (production effect) under “cursor button” “winning frequency abnormality error” “setting 1 setting 2”. The mark of the button 142) and the characters “go to the initial setting menu of the gaming machine” are displayed small like the display just above.

  When the chance button is operated on the screen shown in FIG. 35 (B), the screen is switched to an initial setting menu screen of a gaming machine (not shown). On the initial setting menu screen, the right and left cursor buttons and chance buttons of the effect key 144 are displayed. It is possible to set predetermined items related to the gaming machine 100 by operating. Examples of the predetermined item to be set include time setting of an RTC (real time clock) 454 and setting of an eco mode similar to the volume switch 465 described above.

  In the above description, the determination criterion (reference time) for determining the abnormality in the winning frequency is selected from two types (setting 1 and setting 2). May be. Further, the set determination criterion may be configured to automatically select and set the optimal determination criterion according to the gaming state (for example, when the gaming state becomes short-time or big hit). . As an example, the reference time is 20 seconds for setting 1 and 80 seconds for setting 2, but this is 15 to 20 seconds for setting 1 and 40 to 80 seconds for setting 2, etc. It can be freely set within a predetermined range.

  In addition, the setting time of this criterion (predetermined item related to the gaming machine 100) can be executed when the power is turned on as described above, but this is the time when the power is restored (when the power restoration command is received) described later. Execution may also be performed on the “power recovery” screen. Note that the abnormality-related information stored and backed up (backed up) in the storage unit of the sub-side production control unit 450 by the backup unit when the power is cut off is not limited to the above-described reference time.

  As is clear from the above description, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the setting time of the determination criterion for performing the abnormality determination is regulated when the power is turned on or when the power is restored. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it becomes extremely difficult for a third party other than those related to the hall to set the determination criterion, and as a result, it is possible to contribute to improving the security of the gaming machine 100. In addition, even when it is possible to set predetermined items related to the gaming machine 100 other than the determination criteria, it becomes extremely difficult for a third party to be involved, and as a result, maintenance and safety of the gaming machine 100 are improved. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine 100 that is strong against fraud.

  In addition, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on, so that the hall personnel must meet for each gaming machine 100. As a result, the above-mentioned determination criteria and the setting check and setting change of the predetermined items can be performed. Without forgetting, it is possible to check the setting or change the setting with sufficient time until the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on again. As a result, it is possible to check the setting or change the setting incorrectly. The probability of is significantly reduced.

  In addition, the determination criteria and the predetermined items are set by operating predetermined operation means (the effect key 144 and the effect button 142) that can be operated by the player in accordance with the game state provided in advance in the gaming machine 100. In other words, the game machine 100 is configured to be performed using the existing device. As a result, the configuration of the game machine 100 can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

  In addition, since the determination criteria for performing the abnormality determination are selected and set from a plurality of types, it is possible to flexibly cope with the determination criteria desired by the hole, and as a result, the usability is further improved. At the same time, it is possible to execute appropriate abnormality determination processing and appropriately perform countermeasures such as error notification.

  In addition, the set determination criterion is configured to be stored (backed up) in the storage unit on the sub side by the backup unit when the power is shut down as abnormality related information. In general, in order to detect errors early, various security measures are taken in gaming machines. Such security measures mainly store security information related to error detection (abnormality related information). It is configured to store in the storage unit on the side. However, since the main-side storage means is limited in capacity and most of it is used for main control of games, as a result, security measures for storing security information on the main side are naturally limited. In that respect, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the security information is stored in the storage device on the sub side, so that the degree of freedom of use of the storage device on the main side is increased, and the capacity is limited. It is possible to enhance security measures by effectively utilizing the storage means on the sub-side that is not present. In addition, since the security information stored in the storage unit on the sub side is backed up, it is possible to further enhance security measures. In particular, the gaming machine 100 is provided with a backup power source for backing up the RTC 454 provided in the sub-side effect control unit 450 in advance, so the security information stored in the sub-side storage means using this backup power source. Backing up can simplify the configuration of the gaming machine 100 and reduce the cost.

Returning to FIG. 34, in the notification device or the like, when the effect control unit 450 receives a power-on command, the following processing upon power-on command reception is performed.
・ Main LCD: Display initial appearance (design symbol) (such as “123”), set to normal operation mode (other modes include shipping inspection mode), and reflect when a new command is received Liquid crystal: Initial screen display, reflected when a new command is received, screen transition is synchronized with the main liquid crystal ・ Lamp: Frame lamp and panel lamp are all lit for 60 seconds (brightness, illuminance etc. about 70%), special Symbol and normal symbol related LED, 4th symbol display reflects command ・ Sound: Sounds power-on for 30 seconds ("RAM cleared" + siren, no sound other than power-on sound, 30 seconds The sound is muted after the elapse of time, and the volume is sounded with MAX for 30 seconds (the volume switch 465 and the software volume setting values are not required))
External information terminal: ON output for 200 ms as external information (security), and then OFF output for 200 ms. In the notification device or the like, when the production control unit 450 receives a power recovery command, the following power recovery Processing when a command is received.

・ Main LCD: Displays “Restoring power” for 30 seconds, switches to normal operation mode, and reflects when a new command is received (however, commands with no image change, such as commands related to gaming status / designation / confirmation) Is ignored), if no new command is received for 30 seconds, it automatically shifts to the customer waiting state (when changing from the customer waiting state to the normal background display, the initial appearance (production design) Display (such as “123”)
・ Sub liquid crystal: Black display for 30 seconds, reflected when a new command is received, screen transition is synchronized with the main liquid crystal ・ Lamp: Frame lamp and panel lamp are fully lit for 60 seconds (luminance, illuminance etc. is about 70% ), Special symbol and normal symbol related LED, 4th symbol display will reflect the command • Voice: Sounds power-on for 30 seconds (silencer, no sound other than power-on sound, mute after 30 seconds, 30 For 2 seconds, the volume is sounded with MAX (the volume changeover switch 465 and the software volume setting value are not required))
・ External information terminal: No processing As described above, there are two types of modes: normal operation mode and shipping inspection mode (however, the mode is unconfirmed immediately after power-on (command waiting)). When the first received command is other than the inspection command (1 byte CODE data is an “E9H” type command), the mode is shifted to the normal operation mode. In this normal operation mode, even if a test command is received, it is ignored.

  On the other hand, after the power is turned on, if the first received command is an inspection command, the mode shifts to the shipping inspection mode. In this shipping inspection mode, even if a command other than the inspection command is received, it is ignored. An inspection initialization (system reset) command is prepared for exiting from the shipping inspection mode (as a method, a system reset is performed using a watchdog timer, etc.).

  The power-on designation (no sound) command is handled as an exception command, and even if it is received for the first time after the power is turned on, the mode is not changed, and the operation is performed from either mode. Furthermore, regarding the brightness of the liquid crystal, when the power is turned on, the set value of the brightness volume (not shown) is obtained 16 times, and the average value (rounded down) is reflected, and thereafter, even if the brightness volume changes. (However, it is reflected in real time in the shipping inspection mode).

  With reference to FIG. 36, the contents of the processing relating to the input button and the like at power-on and power restoration will be described next. During the period from when the power supply to the gaming machine 100 is started until the effect control unit 450 receives either the RAM clear preparation command or the power recovery command, the following input buttons (chance button, cursor button ( ↑ → ↓ ←), chance button peripheral lamp, P-FLASH lamp), the following power-on processing (command wait) is performed.

-Chance button (production button 142, the same applies below): Lamp (chance button lamp 475, the same applies below) is lit (brightness, illuminance, etc. is about 30%), button operation is disabled-Cursor button (production key 144, the same applies below) : Button operation disabled-Chance button ambient lamp (Ambient lamp 143, and so on): Lamp (Ambient lamp 143) is lit (luminance, illuminance, etc. is about 30%)
・ P-FLASH lamp (flash LED 495, the same applies hereinafter): lamp (flash LED 495) is lit (brightness, illuminance, etc. is about 30%)
In addition, in the input button or the like, processing at the time of receiving the RAM clear preparation command is performed during a period from when the effect control unit 450 receives the RAM clear preparation command to when receiving the power-on command. Note that the processing at the time of receiving the RAM clear preparation command is the same processing as the processing at the time of power-on (command waiting) described above, and therefore description thereof is omitted here.

In the input button or the like, when the effect control unit 450 receives a power-on command, the following processing when the power-on command is received is performed.
-Chance button: The lamp is lit red for 60 seconds at the lower position (origin position) (4 LEDs red 1, red 2, red 3, red 4 all lit), and the following operations a to d were performed within 30 seconds. Or start frame gimmick action after 30 seconds a. When the chance button is pressed, the chance button is set to the upper position. Red 1 lighting → Red 1 and 2 lighting → Red 1, 2, and 3 lighting → Red 1, 2, 3, and 4 lighting → extinguishing ... Repeat at 500 ms intervals b. If the chance button is pressed when the chance button is in the upper position, the chance button is moved to the lower position. Red 1 lighting-> Red 1, 2 lighting-> Red 1, 2, 3 lighting-> Red 1, 2, 3, 4 lighting-> Off ... Repeat every 250 ms c. After pressing the chance button once, each cursor button is pressed one by one, the chance button surrounding lamp is switched to red → green lighting → blue lighting → white lighting. (The order of the cursor buttons to be pressed is in random order)
d. When the chance button surrounding lamp is lit white, if the chance button is pressed, the frame gimmick operation starts. From a to d, the operation is performed any number of times if the above operation is performed within the effective time. In addition, if the frame gimmick performs the above operation during the origin return operation, the frame gimmick starts operation after the origin return operation is completed. Even if you do, there is no problem to reflect in the production (button operation is valid)
-Cursor button: Even if the cursor button is pressed for 60 seconds, there is no problem in reflecting it in the production (button operation is valid)
-Chance button surrounding lamp: All lamps are lit for 60 seconds (the blinking pattern by the production is invalid for 60 seconds. When each cursor button is pressed one by one, the lamp around the chance button is lit red → green → blue → white Switch and press all buttons so that the lamps around the chance buttons remain white (the order of the cursor buttons to be pressed is in random order))
・ P-FLASH lamp: All lamps are lit for 60 seconds (blink pattern due to production is invalid for 60 seconds)
In the input button or the like, when the effect control unit 450 receives a power recovery command, processing when the power recovery command is received is performed. Note that the processing at the time of receiving the power recovery command is the same as the processing at the time of receiving the power-on command, and the description thereof is omitted here.

  With reference to FIG. 37, the contents of processing related to gimmicks and the like when power is turned on and when power is restored will be described next. The period from when the power supply to the gaming machine 100 is started until the effect control unit 450 receives either the RAM clear preparation command or the power recovery command, such as the following gimmicks (retractable, air vibration, chance button motor) In the case of a patrol motor, patrol lamp, board gimmick), the following power-on processing (command waiting) is performed.

・ Retractable (Retractable motor 481, same as below): Return to origin ・ Air vibration (Vibrator motor 493, Air delivery fan 494, same as below): Stop ・ Chance button motor (Chance button motor 474, same as below): Return to origin ・ Patrol lamp motor ( Patlamp motor 482, and so on): Return to origin ・ Patrol lamp (pat lamp 139, so on): Lamp (patrol lamp 139) is lit (brightness, illuminance, etc. is about 30%)
Board gimmick (board gimmick 109, the same applies below): Return to origin In the above gimmick etc., the RAM clear preparation command is the period from when the effect control unit 450 receives the RAM clear preparation command until the power-on command is received. Processing at the time of reception is performed. Note that the processing at the time of receiving the RAM clear preparation command is the same processing (air vibration, patrol) as the above power-on processing (command wait) or the processing to continue the power-on processing (command wait) (retractable, (Chance button motor, patrol lamp motor, board gimmick), and the description is omitted here.

Further, in the gimmick or the like, when the effect control unit 450 receives a power-on command, the following processing upon power-on command reception is performed.
・ Retractable: Origin stop → Frame gimmick operation start (Open → Stop → Close → Origin stop, etc.) × 1 set, operation by production is invalid for 60 seconds)
・ Air vibration: Operation starts when a command is received → Stops after 30 seconds (Make sure to operate for 30 seconds, (On → Stop) x 1 set, operation by production is invalid for 60 seconds)
-Chance button motor: Origin stop → frame gimmick operation start ((up → down → origin stop etc.) x 1 set)
・ Patrol lamp motor: Stop the origin → Operate for 2 seconds after the retractable 137 opens (operation for production is invalid for 60 seconds)
-Pat lamp: Pat lamp is fully lit for 60 seconds (flash pattern by production is invalid for 60 seconds)
・ Board gimmick: Origin stop (operation by production is invalid for 60 seconds)
Further, in the gimmick or the like, when the effect control unit 450 receives a power recovery command, processing at the time of power recovery command reception is performed. Note that the processing at the time of receiving the power recovery command is the same as the processing at the time of receiving the power-on command, and the description thereof is omitted here.

<Gimmic drive timing at power-on (recovery)>
Here, the drive timings of the frame gimmicks (retractable, air vibrate, patrol lamp motor, chance button motor) and the board gimmick when the power is turned on and when the power is restored will be described with reference to FIGS. The board gimmick and the frame gimmick are respectively set to predetermined initial operations (predetermined in advance) when the gaming machine 100 is turned on (when a command is received when the power is turned on) or when the power is restored (when a command is received when the power is restored). However, if all the gimmicks are driven at the same time, it is not preferable because it involves large power consumption and makes it difficult to confirm the operation.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the initial operations of the board gimmick and the frame gimmick when the power is turned on and when the power is restored are driven at different timings. First, referring to FIG. 38, when power is turned on (waiting for a command), the board gimmick and the frame gimmick start to return to the origin. Thereafter, when a power-on command or a power-recovery command is received, one set of the frame gimmick air vibe is driven.

  In one set drive of the air vibrator, the vibrator motor 493 and the air delivery fan 494 are turned on for 30 seconds. During this time, other frame gimmicks (retractable, patrol motor, chance button motor) and board gimmicks stop at the origin. When the one set driving of the air vibrator is stopped, the frame gimmick driving is started, and the retractable, patrol lamp motor and chance button motor are driven one set during the frame gimmick driving period WGT.

  With reference to FIG. 39, a set of operation sequences in the frame gimmick will be described here. In one set drive of the air vibrator, as described above, the vibrator motor 493 and the air delivery fan 494 are turned on for 30 seconds. Thereafter, when 0.5 second elapses, one set of retractable is driven. In this retractable one-set drive, the retractable motor 481 is driven to release the retractable 137 main body from the origin stop position, and after maintaining this opened state, the operation of closing and stopping again at the origin position is performed in 3 seconds.

  The patrol lamp motor drives one set when 0.5 seconds elapses after the retractable starts driving one set. That is, the patrol lamp motor is driven by one set during the retractable open state. This one-set driving of the patrol lamp motor drives the patrol motor 482 to rotate the patrol lamp 139 main body in a predetermined direction from the origin stop position in 2 seconds. That is, the patrol lamp motor rotates the patrol lamp 139 main body from the origin stop position 0.5 seconds after the retractable starts driving, maintains the rotation for 2 seconds, and then stops at the origin position again. Thereby, when the retractable is moved to open, the patrol lamp 139 is visible at a predetermined position (position where the retractable 137 is opened) after being retracted. After the movement, the patrol motor drives as the initial operation. The retractable stops driving 0.5 seconds after the patrol motor stops driving.

  The chance button motor drives one set when 0.5 seconds elapses after the retractable stops driving one set. In this one-set drive of the chance button motor, the chance button motor 474 is driven to raise the chance button 142 main body from the origin stop position and stop at the upper position, and then lower to the lower position and stop at the origin position. The operation is performed for 1.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 second elapses after the one-set driving of the chance button motor is finished, the frame gimmick driving period WGT is finished and driving of the board gimmick is started. Therefore, the frame gimmick driving period WGT is 6 seconds. The period of the frame gimmick driving period WGT is not limited to 6 seconds, and is determined based on the period of one set driving of each frame gimmick.

  Returning to FIG. 38, the retractable, patrol motor, and chance button motor as the frame gimmick are driven based on one set of operation sequences as described above. When the frame gimmick driving period WGT ends, the driving of the board gimmick is then performed. The board gimmick 109, that is, the upper gimmick 109a, the lower gimmick 109b, the left gimmick 109c, and the right gimmick 109d (see FIG. 1-1) are driven about once during the board gimmick driving period BGT. The upper gimmick 109a, the lower gimmick 109b, the left gimmick 109c, and the right gimmick 109d as these board gimmicks are not shown in the figure, but may be individually operated according to the above-mentioned frame gimmick driving. However, a predetermined number of board gimmicks may be operated at a time difference so that they overlap simultaneously or partially.

  Then, after receiving the power-on command or the power-recovery command, that is, after the start of driving of the air vibrator, 60 seconds elapse, in other words, when 24 seconds elapse after the frame gimmick driving period WGT ends. The board surface gimmick driving period BGT ends, and when this board surface gimmick driving period BGT ends, all the gimmicks (board surface gimmick and frame gimmick) are stopped at the origin position. Therefore, the board gimmick driving period BGT is 24 seconds. In addition, the period of this board surface gimmick drive period BGT is not limited to 24 seconds, but this is determined based on the drive period of about 1 time of each board surface gimmick.

  As is clear from the above explanation, the drive timing of the board gimmick and the frame gimmick when the power is turned on and when the power is restored is driven at different timings in the order of air vibe → retractable → patrol motor → chance button motor → board gimmick. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to easily check the operation of each gimmick without using large power consumption by gimmick driving at the time of power-on and power recovery. In addition, for gimmicks such as patrol lamps 139 where the standby position is not visually recognized, driving is performed as an initial operation after moving to a predetermined visible position. Can be easily performed.

  The operations of the above-mentioned board gimmick and frame gimmick when the power is turned on and when the power is restored are the same as the above-mentioned a to d with respect to the chance button within 30 seconds after receiving the power-on command or the power restoration command. The case where the operation is not performed has been described as an example. However, if the operations a to d are performed within 30 seconds, a part or all of the driving of the air vibe and retractable, the patrol motor and the chance button motor is performed. It overlaps (a part or all of the air vibe driving period and the frame gimmick driving period WGT overlap). Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive of the chance button motor and the drive of the retractable and patrol lamp motors are configured to be driven at timings different from each other. However, some or all of these drives also overlap. You may comprise.

  That is, the drive timing of the board gimmick and the frame gimmick when the power is turned on and when the power is restored may be such that at least the drive timings of the board gimmick and the frame gimmick are different. In this case, the board gimmick is driven during a predetermined first period (for example, the board gimmick driving period BGT), and the frame gimmick is a predetermined second period (at least part of which is different from the first period). For example, it may be driven during the frame gimmick driving period WGT).

  In addition, the retractable, patrol motor, and chance button motor as frame gimmicks at the time of power-on and power-recovery (when power-on command and power-recovery command are received) Processing is performed.

・ For retractable, check the opening / closing operation of retractable 137 (forward and reverse)
-For the patrol lamp motor, check the rotation of the patrol lamp 139 (forward and reverse)
-For the chance button motor, check the up / down movement of the chance button 142 (reverse rotation)
Further, the following processing is performed as an operation check at the time of common driving of the retractable, patrol lamp motor and chance button motor.

・ Check the origin detection. ・ Check whether it stops at the initial position regardless of the position. ・ If an operation command is received during the operation check, check whether the operation command is ignored. As an error detection method, for example, if the retractable, patrol lamp motor and chance button motor are driven for a certain period of time to check whether the origin can be detected, and if the origin is not detected even after being driven for a certain period of time, As a process of, it is stopped after a certain period of time.

<Timer interrupt processing of production control unit 450>
Based on FIG. 40, the timer interruption process performed in the production control unit 450 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. This process is performed during normal operation except for special cases such as when the gaming machine 100 is turned on (power is restored) or when the power is turned off by a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) provided in the effect control unit 450. Are repeatedly executed every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms). Also, the processing performed by the effect control unit 450 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 40 and thereafter is executed based on the program stored in the sub ROM 452, but the processing not mainly related to the present invention is omitted. ing.

  When this timer interrupt process is executed, in step S4000, the sub CPU 451 executes a sound volume (eco mode) switching monitoring process. The volume switching monitoring process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

In step S4002, the sub CPU 451 executes a gimmick monitoring process. The gimmick monitoring process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
In S4004, the sub CPU 451 executes a game related command reception process. The game-related command reception process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

In step S4006, the sub CPU 451 executes abnormality related command reception processing. The abnormality-related command reception process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.
In S4007, the sub CPU 451 executes a winning information RAM remaining time countdown process. The prize information RAM is a RAM provided in the abnormality-related information storage area of the sub RAM 453 and used for executing a prize frequency abnormality error process, which will be described later. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. For example, the reference time (for example, 20 seconds or 80 seconds set by setting 1 or setting 2 of the RAM clear preparation screen in FIG. 35) is set as the maximum elapsed time after the game ball has won the normal winning device 122. ) Until the time is counted down. Since the timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 450 is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 ms, the remaining time of the winning information RAM is counted down every 4 ms each time the process of S4007 is performed.

In step S4008, the sub CPU 451 executes input device processing. The input device process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.
In step S4010, the sub CPU 451 performs command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the sub RAM 453 to the image sound control unit 460 or the lamp control unit 470. By performing this command transmission processing, the image sound control unit 460 is instructed to perform an effect by image display on the sub display device 107 and the main display device 108, sound output from the speaker 138, and the like. The lamp control unit 470 is instructed to execute the effect by the instrument, gimmick, or the like.

<Volume switching monitoring process>
Based on FIG. 41, the volume switching monitoring process in S4000 of FIG. 40 will be described here. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the contents of the volume switching monitoring process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. First, in S4100, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the setting of the volume switch 465 (see FIG. 4B) as a hardware volume switch (H / W switch in the drawing) has been changed. If the sub CPU 451 determines that the setting of the volume switch 465 has been changed (S4100: Yes), the process proceeds to S4102, and if it is determined that the volume has not been changed (S4100: No), the process proceeds to S4104.

  In step S4102, the sub CPU 451 sets the value of the software volume (S / W volume in the figure) for adjusting the volume by software to the value corresponding to the volume change switch 465 whose setting has been changed, that is, the hardware volume whose setting has been changed (illustrated). Then, it is set (reset) to a value corresponding to the H / W volume). Thereafter, the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S4104.

  In S4104, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the gaming state is waiting for the customer (after receiving the demonstration designation command to before receiving the variable effect start command (software volume adjustable period), see FIG. 9). If it is determined that it is in the middle (S4104: Yes), the process proceeds to S4106. If it is determined that the customer is not waiting (S4104: No), the process is interrupted by the timer interrupt process (S4002: gimmick) in FIG. Return to the monitoring process.

  In step S4106, the sub CPU 451 starts a reset timer (120 seconds) for resetting the set software volume value, and the process proceeds to step S4108. In step S4108, the main display device 108 is displayed on the display screen waiting for the customer. It is determined whether a predetermined screen is being displayed. In addition, as a predetermined screen of this S4108, for example, a screen (game history display screen or password input screen) related to a later-described pachi log, a screen that can use the left and right buttons of the production key 144 (basically waiting for a customer) The screen selected on the top menu screen described later). If the sub CPU 451 determines that the predetermined screen is being displayed (S4108: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S4002: gimmick monitoring process) in FIG. 40 and determines that the predetermined screen is not being displayed. If so (S4108: No), the process proceeds to S4110.

  In step S4110, the sub CPU 451 is generating an error sound as a voice notification by the voice output device (speaker) 138 based on a command for notifying the sub side that an abnormality has occurred in the above-described abnormality processing (see FIG. 17). It is determined whether or not. If the sub CPU 451 determines that the error sound is ringing (S4110: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S4002: gimmick monitoring process) in FIG. 40 and determines that the error sound is not ringing. If so (S4110: No), the process proceeds to S4112.

  In S4112, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the effect key 144 have been operated in order to adjust the volume of the software volume. If the sub CPU 451 determines that it has been operated (S4112: Yes), the process proceeds to S4114. If it is determined that no operation has been performed (S4112: No), the process proceeds to S4116.

  In step S4114, the sub CPU 451 executes a volume switching process for switching the volume of the software volume based on the operation of the left and right buttons (hereinafter also simply referred to as the left and right buttons) of the effect key 144. Here, a method for adjusting the software volume will be described. The software volume adjustment method is performed as follows.

-On the screen waiting for the customer, a display suggesting that the volume can be adjusted is displayed (displayed in synchronization with the suggestion of the top menu display waiting for the customer (the operation button 142 suggests the operation) and also displayed in the top menu)
-As described above, the volume is adjusted by operating the left and right buttons during the software volume adjustment period, and the adjustable range is 0 to 100 steps, and converted to the following upper limit to lower limit volume values. Upper limit: Hardware volume switch Volume value (for example, “100”) of “Large” (“3” and “D” of volume switch 465, see FIG. 4-2)
Lower limit: Volume value (for example, “0”) of “small” of the hardware volume switch (“1” of the volume switch 465, see FIG. 4-2)
・ When the volume value is changed with the left and right buttons, a sound as a guide is sounded. ・ The volume value screen display (main display device 108) is as follows. Volume value is displayed as numerical value (0-100) and scale display (0-20 scale)
A. Increase the volume value by one step for each operation of the right button, subtract the volume value by one step for each operation of the left button c. The numerical value display (0 to 100) is added and subtracted in synchronization with the volume value in one stage of addition / subtraction, and the scale display (0 to 20 scale) is added in increments of 1 (subtracted from left to right) (If the button is operated for a predetermined time (15 steps or more), the numerical display and scale display are displayed continuously.)
D. The volume value is displayed on the screen from the time when the left and right buttons are operated, and at that time, the position and size do not overlap with the effect design etc. In addition, the screen display is turned off after 3 seconds from the left and right button operations. Although the possible width is 0 to 100 steps, this is not limited and may be, for example, 1 to 10 steps. Further, the volume value number display and the scale display are not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen display of a software volume adjustable period for each gaming state and a volume value. As shown in the figure, in the software volume, the volume can be adjusted on the screen where the left and right buttons of the production key 144 can be used from the start of waiting for customers (here, as an example, a game history screen related to the pachinko log). This is the period until the screen is displayed, the period from the end of the history screen to the start of the change in the production symbol, the period during the production design change or the waiting for the customer, and the customer Even when waiting, the volume adjustment is impossible during the period displayed on the history screen. The screen display of the volume value on the main display device 108 is displayed when the left and right buttons are pressed during the volume adjustable period, and this is when 3 seconds elapse after the left and right buttons are pressed or when the volume adjustable period ends. It is supposed to be erased.

  Returning to FIG. 41, in S4116, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the reset timer has expired, that is, whether or not 120 seconds have elapsed since the reset timer started. When the sub CPU 451 determines that 120 seconds have elapsed (S4116: Yes), the process proceeds to S4118, and when it is determined that 120 seconds have not elapsed (S4116: No), the processing is performed by the timer interrupt process of FIG. Return to (S4002: gimmick monitoring process).

  In S4118, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the value of the software volume is smaller than the value of the hardware volume (the setting value of the volume switch 465). If the sub CPU 451 determines that the value is smaller (S4118: Yes), the process proceeds to S4120. If it is determined that it is not small (S4118: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S4002: gimmick monitoring process) in FIG. Here, the value of the hardware volume is, for example, “100” when “Large” (the setting of the volume selection switch 465 is “3” “D”), and “Medium” (the setting of the volume selection switch 465 is “2”). ) Is set to “70” and “small” (the volume switch 465 is set to “1”), “0” is set. Therefore, in this case, if the hardware volume setting is “large” and the software volume value is less than “100”, and the hardware volume setting is “medium” and the software volume value is less than “70”, Yes in S4118. It becomes.

In step S4120, the sub CPU 451 resets the software volume value to the volume value set in the hardware volume. In other words, in the processing of S4112 to S4120, if the software volume value is smaller than the volume value set by the hardware volume switch, the software volume is changed to hardware after 120 seconds of no operation of the left and right buttons of the effect key 144 while waiting for the customer. Reset to a value corresponding to the volume switch (If the software volume value is not smaller than the volume value set by the hardware volume switch, the software volume value is not reset)
.

  Further, in the above-described volume switching monitoring process, if the error sound starts during the software volume value screen display, the sub CPU 451 deletes the volume value screen display. At this time, the software volume value is stored and held in the sub RAM 453. Note that the priority relationship between the software volume and the hardware volume is not limited to the above. For example, the hardware volume value may be unconditionally prioritized over the software volume value. May be unconditionally prioritized over the hardware volume value.

<Gimmic monitoring process>
Based on FIG. 43, the gimmick monitoring process in S4002 of FIG. 40 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gimmick monitoring process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. First, in S4300, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the retractable, patrol lamp motor, and chance button motor as a frame gimmick are operating in normal times except for special cases such as when power is turned on and when power is restored. If the sub CPU 451 determines that the normal operation is being performed (S4300: Yes), the process proceeds to S4302, and if it is determined that the normal operation is not being performed (S4300: No), the process proceeds to S4312.

  In S4302, the sub CPU 451 performs the following normal operation confirmation process as operation confirmation during the normal operation of the retractable, patrol motor, and chance button motor.

-Check if the next drive is entered with the excitation pattern when stopped-Check whether the operation command is ignored when receiving an operation command irregularly during operation-Detect origin even after driving for a certain period of time If not, check whether to pause for a certain period of time (check if origin monitoring processing is included)
-The position is monitored at the start of fluctuation, and if it is abnormal, the sub CPU 451 confirms whether it operates to a normal position. After completing the normal operation confirmation process in S4302, the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S4304, and the normal operation described above It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation confirmation process. If it is determined that there is an abnormality (S4304: Yes), the process proceeds to S4306. If it is determined that there is no abnormality (S4304: No), the process proceeds to S4308. .

  In step S4306, the sub CPU 451 stops the frame gimmick after a certain period of time as a process at the time of error. That is, in the processing of S4304 and S4306, as an error detection method in the normal operation confirmation described above, for example, the retractable, patrol motor, and chance button motor are driven for a certain period of time to check whether the origin can be detected, If the origin cannot be detected even after driving for a period of time, the process is stopped after an elapse of a certain time as an error process. Thereafter, the sub CPU 451 returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4004: game-related command reception process) of FIG.

  In step S4308, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a door opening error start designation command (FIG. 21, S2106) for notifying that a door opening error has occurred has been received, and if it has been received (S4308: Yes). Then, the process proceeds to S4310, and if it is determined that it has not been received (S4308: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S4004: game-related command reception process) in FIG.

  In S4310, based on the reception of the door opening error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 returns the frame gimmick to the original position before the operation and stops the operation. That is, when the glass frame 150 or the inner frame 170 is opened during normal operation, the retractable, patrol lamp motor, and chance button motor return to the origin position and stop their operation. Thus, when the frame gimmick is retractable, the retractable is closed, in the case of a patrol motor, the patrol lamp stops rotating, and in the case of a chance button motor, it stops at a position where the chance button does not protrude. become. Thereafter, the sub CPU 451 returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4004: game-related command reception process) of FIG.

  In S4312, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not it has received a door opening error end designation command (FIG. 21, S2112) for notifying that the door opening error has ended, and determines that it has been received (S4312: Yes). Then, the process proceeds to S4314, and if it is determined that it has not been received (S4312: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 40 (S4004: game-related command reception process).

  In S4314, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the frame gimmick is still in the operation period. That is, in the processing of S4314, the frame gimmick that has been returned to the state before the operation (origin) at the time of the door opening error and stopped operating is still in operation when the door opening error ends. It is determined whether or not (for example, a signal to be operated is still received). If the sub CPU 451 determines that the operation period is still in progress (S4314: Yes), the process proceeds to S4316. If the sub CPU 451 determines that the operation period has already elapsed (S4314: No), the process proceeds to FIG. To the timer interrupt process (S4004: game-related command reception process).

  In S4316, the sub CPU 451 restores the frame gimmick operation. In other words, in the processing of S4316, the frame gimmick that has been stopped by returning to the state before the operation (origin) at the time of the door opening error is restored when the door opening error ends, and the operation before the stop is performed. Continue to start. Thereafter, the sub CPU 451 returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4004: game-related command reception process) of FIG.

  As is apparent from the above description, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, in this gimmick monitoring process, when a door opening error occurs during the operation of the frame gimmick, the frame gimmick is set to the state before the operation (origin). It is configured to return and stop the operation. Therefore, according to such a configuration, the frame gimmick that is movable outside the gaming machine 100 collides with an unexpected device or device (for example, an adjacent gaming machine, a ball lending machine, a card unit, or a display). It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as damage (it is also possible to avoid damage to colliding devices and equipment), and as a result, maintenance and safety of the gaming machine 100 and its peripheral devices and equipment can be improved. .

  Furthermore, when the door opening error ends, if the frame gimmick is originally an operation period, it is configured to recover the stopped frame gimmick operation. Therefore, according to such a configuration, even if the frame gimmick returned to the state before the operation due to the door opening error is closed and the error ends, the gaming machine does not operate again in the state as it is. Compared to the above, the gameability is not lowered, and as a result, the game preference is improved.

  In the above-described gimmick monitoring process, the case where a door opening error occurs during the frame gimmick operation has been described. However, the same applies to the case where the frame gimmick operation is started during the door opening error. Also, the board gimmick 109 may perform a process according to the process for the frame gimmick in the gimmick monitoring process described above. The frame gimmick is not limited to the retractable, patrol motor, and chance button motor described above, and includes any frame gimmick that operates outside the gaming machine 100.

<Game-related command reception processing>
Based on FIGS. 44 and 45, the game-related command reception process performed in S4004 will be described. 44 and 45 are flowcharts showing the contents of game-related command reception processing performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. First, in S4400, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a demo designation command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S911 in FIG. 9).

  When it is determined that the demo designation command is received (S4400: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S4402, and when it is determined that the demo designation command is not received (S4400: No), the process is performed. The process moves to S4404. In S4402, the sub CPU 451 executes a demo designation command reception process.

<Demo designation command reception processing>
The contents of the demo designation command reception process performed in S4402 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the contents of the demonstration designation command reception process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. First, in step S4600, the sub CPU 451 sets a predetermined time (for example, 30 to 90 seconds) as the demonstration standby time Td.

  The demonstration designation command is a command received when there is no start memory of the first starter 116 and the second starter 118 as described above and the main display device 108 no longer executes the variation display of the effect symbol related to the big hit lottery. Therefore, the measurement time of the demonstration standby time Td represents an elapsed time after the change display of the effect symbol is not executed on the main display device 108.

  Next, the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S4604, and determines whether or not a variable effect start command has been received before the demonstration standby time Td set here has elapsed (see S916 in FIG. 9). The variation effect start command is received when the variation display of the effect symbol related to the big win lottery is started on the main display device 108 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starter 116 and the second starter 118 as described above. Therefore, if it is determined that the variable effect start command has been received before the demonstration standby time Td elapses (S4604: YES), the sub CPU 451 determines that the gaming machine 100 is not in the customer waiting state. This demonstration designation command reception process is terminated, and the process returns to the game related command reception process (S4404) shown in FIG. Thereby, on the main display device 108, the variable display of the effect symbol related to the jackpot lottery that has been stopped is resumed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4604 that the variation effect start command has not been received (S4604: NO), the sub CPU 451 determines that the gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, moves the process to S4606, and waits for the customer. Set the demo flag to ON to execute the demonstration performance (demo movie). Then, the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S4608, sets a demonstration effect start command for instructing the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 in the sub RAM 453, and sets it in the main display device 108, the audio output device 138, and the like. Start the demonstration production (demo movie). Thereby, on the main display device 108, the screen of the effect symbol related to the jackpot lottery that has been stopped is switched to the demonstration effect screen for waiting for customers.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 4B described above, when the gaming machine 100 is set to the eco mode by the volume switch 465, the demonstration effect screen on the sub display device 107 and the main display device 108 is The brightness of the backlight is changed to 50% from the start of the demonstration production (demo movie), that is, after the demonstration standby time Td has elapsed since the reception of the demonstration designation command. When a pachinko log screen described later is displayed by the player's operation, the brightness of the backlight is returned to the original value until the pachinko log screen is finished. In other words, the brightness control of the liquid crystal backlight in the sub display device 107 and the main display device 108 is performed such that when the gaming machine 100 is set to the eco mode, the brightness is set to 50% from the start of the demonstration for the customer (demo movie). The brightness changed to 50% is restored to the original value until the next demonstration production (demo movie) starts when the variation display of the production symbol is started or the log screen is displayed. It becomes control to return.

  Even if the volume switch 465 is not set to the eco mode, the predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, the demo movie ends and the predetermined time elapses (the predetermined time elapses in the customer waiting state). In this case, the gaming machine 100 may be automatically set to the eco mode.

  The demonstration effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission process in S4010 of FIG. When the process of S4608 is completed, the sub CPU 451 ends the demonstration designation command reception process and returns the process to the game related command reception process (S4404) shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 44, in S4404, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a hold number increase command (first hold number increase command or second hold number increase command) is received from the main control unit 400 (FIG. 8). (See S810 and S822). If it is determined that a pending number increase command has been received (S4404: Yes), the process proceeds to S4406. If it is determined that a pending number increase command has not been received (S4404: No), the process proceeds to S4414.

  In step S4406, the sub CPU 451 executes a pending number addition process. Specifically, when the sub CPU 451 receives the first hold number increase command, the sub CPU 451 adds 1 to the hold number of the first special symbol lottery stored in the sub RAM 453 and instructs the image sound control unit 460 to The display device 108 is caused to add one reserved image indicating the number of the first special symbol lottery held (in practice, it is excluded or displayed as the reserved image).

  Similarly, when the sub CPU 451 receives the second hold number increase command, the sub CPU 451 adds 1 to the hold number of the second special symbol lottery stored in the sub RAM 453 and instructs the image sound control unit 460 to display the main display device. One reserved image indicating the number of the second special symbol lottery is added to 108 (actually, the first image is excluded or displayed as the reserved image).

  In S4408, the sub CPU 451 performs a prefetch hold display lottery process for determining whether or not to change the hold image additionally displayed in S4406 to display the prefetch notice mode. Specifically, the sub CPU 451 determines to change the hold image additionally displayed in S4406 to the pre-read notice mode when the prior determination information included in the received hold increase command indicates a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the prior determination information included in the received hold increase command indicates a loss, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not to change the hold image additionally displayed in S4406 to the prefetch notice mode. Make a lottery.

  In step S4410, the sub CPU 451 determines whether execution of prefetch hold display has been determined in step S4408. If it is determined that execution of prefetch hold display is determined (S4410: Yes), the process proceeds to S4412. If it is determined that execution is not determined (S4410: No), the process proceeds to S4414.

  In S4412, the sub CPU 451 executes prefetch hold display. Specifically, after instructing the image sound control unit 460 to cause the main display device 108 to perform prefetch hold display, the process proceeds to S4414.

  In S4414, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the variable effect start command set in S916 of FIG. 9 has been received. And when it determines with having received the change production start command (S4414: Yes), a process is moved to S4416, and when it determines with not having received (S4414: No), a process is moved to S4426.

  In step S4416, the sub CPU 451 analyzes the variation effect start command received in step S4414. At this time, if the demo flag is set to ON in S4606 in FIG. 46 described above, that is, if the gaming machine 100 is in a standby state and is executing a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, the sub CPU 451 Is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S4418.

  In S4418, the sub CPU 451 determines an effect symbol variation effect pattern based on the setting information included in the variation effect start command, and moves the process to S4420. The setting information included in the variation production start command is information indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol set by the big hit determination process (see FIG. 10) of S912 in FIG. 9 (that is, whether it was a big hit, lost, or big hit) Information indicating which jackpot has been won), information indicating the special symbol variation time (variation pattern) set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 11) of S914 in FIG. 9, and whether to execute reach production Contains information indicating whether or not. Further, the sub CPU 451 determines one effect pattern by lottery from a plurality of effect patterns that satisfy the conditions indicated by the setting information included in the change effect start command.

  In S4420, the sub CPU 451 executes a hold number subtraction process, and moves the process to S4422. Specifically, the sub CPU 451 has information indicating which one of the determination of the first special symbol lottery result and the determination of the second special symbol lottery result included in the setting information of the variable effect start command is executed. When it is determined that the determination of one special symbol lottery result has been executed, the number of the first special symbol lottery stored in the sub-RAM 453 is decremented by 1, and the image sound control unit 460 is instructed to the main display device 108. One reserved image indicating the number of the first special symbol lottery that is displayed earliest is displayed (deleted) (actually, the first image is excluded or the reserved image is deleted).

  Similarly, the sub CPU 451 indicates that information indicating which of the determination of the first special symbol lottery result and the determination of the second special symbol lottery result included in the setting information of the variable effect start command is executed is the second special symbol. When it is determined that the determination of the symbol lottery result has been executed, the number of the second special symbol lottery held in the sub-RAM 453 is decremented by 1, and the image display control unit 460 is instructed to be the earliest on the main display device 108. One reserved image indicating the number of held second special symbol lotteries displayed is digested (deleted) (in practice, the first image is excluded or the reserved image is deleted).

  In S4422, the sub CPU 451 starts the effect symbol variation effect of the effect pattern determined in S4418. Specifically, the sub CPU 451 sets a command for instructing execution of the above-described effect pattern in the sub RAM 453. This command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission processing in S4010 of FIG. Thereby, in synchronization with the special symbol display by the display device 104, the display of the effect symbol variation effect by the main display device 108 is started, and the sound output and light emission of the effect symbol variation effect by the speaker 138, the panel lamp 110, etc. are started. The When the process of S4422 is completed, the process moves to S4424, and the sub CPU 451 executes an effect history storage process.

<Production history storage processing>
The contents of the effect history storage process performed in S4424 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect history storage process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. First, in step S4700, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the login flag stored in the sub RAM 453 is ON.

  When it is determined that the logged-in flag is ON (S4700: Yes), that is, when the player logs in to the gaming machine 100 using the input device 145 and the game history information can be stored in the sub-RAM 453, the processing If it is determined that the login flag is OFF (S4700: No), the process proceeds to S4704. Details of the login process will be described later.

  In S4702, effect information corresponding to the variable effect pattern determined in S4418 of the co-game related command reception process shown in FIG. 44 is stored in the sub-RAM 453. Thereby, the gaming machine 100 can accumulate the history information (effect information) of the variation effect pattern when a game with a login request is being performed. When the determined variation effect pattern has relevance over a plurality of variation displays, the sub CPU 451 also includes the plurality of times information as auxiliary effect information of the effect information together with the effect information. To remember.

  In step S4704, the sub CPU 451 determines whether the mission execution flag in the sub RAM 453 is ON. Here, the “mission” is one of the effects having the execution condition of predetermined game content as an achievement condition. The contents of the mission include the number of consecutive big hits, the magnitude of the number of lottery lotteries in the case of a big win, the case of a big hit during a specific production, and the case where a specific production is executed.

  If it is determined that the mission execution flag is ON (S4704: Yes), that is, it is determined that the player is executing a mission and the achievement status of the mission being executed can be stored in the sub-RAM 453. In this case, the process proceeds to S4706, and if it is determined that the mission execution flag is OFF (S4704: No), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the game-related command reception process (S4500) shown in FIG.

  In S4706, the sub CPU 451 reads out mission information stored in the sub RAM 453, and moves the process to S4708. As a result, the sub CPU 451 can grasp which mission is currently set and being executed. The mission of this embodiment is set when it is determined that the player will challenge under certain conditions. Specifically, setting a mission means that the sub CPU 451 stores “mission information” indicating information related to the contents of the mission in the sub RAM 453.

  In S4708, the sub CPU 451 analyzes the mission achievement status for the effect information corresponding to the variable effect pattern, and stores it in the sub RAM 453. The sub CPU 451 compares the effect information stored in S4702 with the mission information read in S4706, calculates the achievement rate from the comparison result, and stores it in the sub RAM 453 as the mission achievement status. This is the end of the description of the effect history storage process, and the description returns to the game-related command reception process of FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 44, in S4426, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the variable effect stop command set in the process of S922 of FIG. 9 has been received. And when it determines with having received the change production stop command (S4426: Yes), a process is moved to S4428, and when it determines with not having received (S4426: No), a process is moved to S4500 (refer FIG. 45). In S <b> 4428, the sub CPU 451 ends the effect symbol variation effect started in the process of S <b> 4422, moves the process to S <b> 4430, and executes effect history storage processing.

<Change history storage processing>
The contents of the change history storage process performed in S4430 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the change history storage process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. First, in step S4800, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the login flag stored in the sub RAM 453 is ON. This process is the same process as S4700 in FIG. 47 described above.

  If the sub CPU 451 determines that the logged-in flag is ON (S4800: Yes), the process proceeds to S4802, and if it is determined that the logged-in flag is OFF (S4800: No), the process proceeds to S4806.

  In S4802, the sub CPU 451 stores the symbol information corresponding to the effect symbol data set in S4418 of the game-related command reception process shown in FIG. 44 described above in the sub RAM 453. This effect symbol data is effect symbol data corresponding to the determination result in the jackpot determination process of FIG. 10 described above. Thereby, the gaming machine 100 can accumulate the history information of the effect symbol data (symbol information) corresponding to the jackpot determination result when a game with a login request is being performed. Thereafter, the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S4804.

  In S4804, the sub CPU 451 adds 1 to the count counter for the number of special symbol variations, using the number of variation effect stop commands confirmed in S4426 of the game-related command reception process of FIG. 44 described above as the number of variations of the special symbol. Update. Then, the updated value of the counter is stored in the sub RAM 453. As a result, the gaming machine 100 can accumulate history information of the number of changes in the special symbol when a game with a login request is being performed. Thereafter, the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S4806.

  In step S4806, the sub CPU 451 determines whether the mission execution flag in the sub RAM 453 is ON. This process is the same as S4704 shown in FIG. If the sub CPU 451 determines that the mission execution flag is ON (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to S4808. If the sub CPU 451 determines that the mission execution flag is OFF (S4806: No), the process ends. Then, the process returns to the game-related command reception process (S4500) shown in FIG.

  In S4808, the sub CPU 451 reads out mission information stored in the sub RAM 453, moves the process to S4810, and analyzes and stores the mission achievement status. This process is the same as S4708 in FIG. 47 described above. Thereby, the gaming machine 100, when the currently set mission is related to the effect symbol data corresponding to the jackpot determination result and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, history information (symbol information) of the accumulated effect symbol data and It is possible to analyze how much the number of special symbol changes has achieved the mission. This is the end of the description of the change history storage process, and the description returns to the game-related command reception process of FIGS. 44 and 45.

  In S4500 of FIG. 45, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the opening command set in the process of S1306 of FIG. 13 has been received. If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4500: Yes), the process proceeds to S4502. If it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4500: No), the process proceeds to S4504.

  In S4502, the sub CPU 451 determines and determines the type of jackpot game effect (probability jackpot game effect or normal jackpot game effect) based on the information included in the opening command (or the setting information used in S4418). A command for instructing the start of the big hit game effect is set in the sub RAM 453. This command set in the sub RAM 453 is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission processing in S4010 of FIG. As a result, an opening effect (that is, a big hit game effect) indicating the start of a probable big hit game or a normal big hit game is started by the main display device 108, the speaker 138, the panel lamp 110, and the like. Thereafter, in S4504, the sub CPU 451 executes a probability variation confirmed area passing effect process.

<Probability change area passing effect processing>
With reference to FIG. 49, the contents of the probability variation confirmed area passing effect process performed in S4504 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the content of the probability variation confirmed area passing effect process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. First, in step S4900, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not one of the first to fourth probability variation big hit games in the big hit five sets described with reference to FIGS. 5A and 5B is being executed. .

  Specifically, the sub CPU 451 executes the processing in S4508 in FIG. 45 to be described later after the opening of the probability variation big hit (any one of the first to fourth probability big hits in the set of 5 big hits) is started in S4502 in FIG. If it is determined that it is during the period until the ending of the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot ends (S4900: Yes), the process proceeds to S4902, and if it is determined that it is not within this period (S4900: No), the process is performed. Returning to the game-related command reception processing (S4506) of FIG.

  In step S4902, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not it is during the probability variation fixed region (V region) passage detection valid period. Here, the V region detection effective period will be described. Although not described in the big winning device processing of FIG. 14, the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400 provides an effective period (V area passage detection effective period) for detecting that the game ball has passed the V area 204. ing.

  Specifically, the main CPU 401 determines the period from the time when the second big winning device 146 is released at 8R of the probability variation big hit game shown in FIG. 5A to the time when the ending effect of the probability variation big hit game ends. The period from the time when the second big winning device 146 is released in 8R of the normal big hit game shown in FIG. 5-1 (b) to the time when the ending effect of the normal big hit game is ended is set as the V region passage detection effective period. In S1434 of the big winning device process of FIG. 14, the passage of the game ball to the V area 204 is detected only during the V area passage detection valid period.

  Accordingly, in S4902, the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450 receives the second big prize winning device release notification command set in S1414 in FIG. 14 (that is, after the second big prize winning device 146 is released). 15, if it is during the period until 10 seconds have elapsed after receiving the ending command set in S1502 of FIG. 15 (that is, until the ending effect ends), it is determined that it is during the V region passage detection effective period. If it is not during this period, it is determined that it is not during the V region passage detection effective period. If it is determined that it is during the V region passage detection valid period (S4902: Yes), the process proceeds to S4904. If it is determined that it is not within the valid period (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S2912.

  In step S4904, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the probability variation confirmed area passing command set in step S1436 in FIG. 14 has been received. In S1436 of FIG. 14, the main CPU 401 sets a V area passing command in the main RAM 403 every time the game ball passes the V area 204. Therefore, the sub CPU 451 receives a V region passing command every time the game ball passes the V region 204. If the sub CPU 451 determines that the V region passing command has been received (S4904: Yes), the process proceeds to S4906. If the sub CPU 451 determines that it has not been received (S4904: No), the process proceeds to S4914.

  In step S4906, the sub CPU 451 updates the value of V stored in the sub RAM 453 by adding 1 (counting up). Here, V is a value indicating the number of times that the game ball has passed through the V region 204 in the current probability big hit game. In subsequent S4908, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the value of V stored in the sub RAM 453 matches a predetermined number V0 (for example, 3). If V matches V0 (S4908: Yes), the process proceeds to S4910. If V does not match V0 (S4908: No), the process proceeds to S4914.

  In step S4910, the sub CPU 451 sets, in the sub RAM 453, a command for instructing execution of the high suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. This command set in the sub RAM 453 is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission processing in S4010 of FIG. As a result, the highly accurate suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 5-2 is executed. Thereafter, the process returns to the game-related command reception process (S4506) of FIG.

  In S4912, the sub CPU 451 sets the value of V stored in the sub RAM 453 to “0”. Specifically, when the value of V stored in the sub RAM 453 has been updated by the processing of S4906, the value of V is reset to the initial value “0”. Thereafter, the process returns to the game-related command reception process (S4506) of FIG.

  In step S4914, the sub CPU 451 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) set in advance has elapsed. Specifically, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the V region passage detection effective period within the V region passage detection effective period. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4914: Yes), the process proceeds to S4916. If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4914: No), the process is processed as a game-related command reception process in FIG. Return to (S4506).

  In S4916, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the value of V stored in the sub RAM 453 is larger than 0 and smaller than the predetermined number V0. If 0 <V <V0 (S4916: Yes), the process proceeds to S4918. If V ≦ 0 or V0 ≦ V (S4916: No), the process proceeds to the game-related command reception process (S4506) in FIG. return.

  In S4918, the sub CPU 451 sets the value of V stored in the sub RAM 453 to “V0”. Specifically, after updating the value of V smaller than V0 stored in the sub RAM 453 to V0, the process proceeds to S4910.

  Here, the above-described V region passage effect process will be specifically described by taking as an example a case where “3” is set as the predetermined number V0. First, when a probable big hit game is being executed (S4900: Yes), the second big winning device 146 is opened in a predetermined round (eighth round), so that the game ball can pass through the V region 204. The V region passage detection valid period during which the passage of the game ball can be detected is entered (S4902: Yes).

  When the game ball passes through the V region 204 during the V region passage detection valid period, a V region passing command is received every time it passes (S4904: Yes), and the value of V is counted up and updated (S4906). ). Therefore, when the first and second game balls pass through the V region 204, the values of V are “1” and “2”, respectively, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4914: No), the high A positive suggestion is never executed. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V region 204, the value of V is updated to “3”, which coincides with the predetermined number V0 (S4908: Yes), and thus a highly accurate suggestion effect is executed (S4910).

  Furthermore, even if the fourth and subsequent game balls pass through the V region 204 during the V region passage detection valid period (S4902: Yes), the value of V becomes a value of 4 or more by counting up. It does not coincide with “3” again during the V region passage detection valid period (S4908: No). In addition, even if the predetermined time has elapsed (S4914: Yes), the value of V is 4 or more (S2216: No), and therefore the highly suggestive effect is not executed again.

  As described above, the sub CPU 451 receives the detection information (V region passing command) indicating that the game ball has passed each time it passes the V region 204 from the main control unit 400. ) Is executed only when the game ball passes through the V region 204, and even if game balls other than the predetermined number (third) pass through the V region 204, the high suggestion effect is not executed. .

  As a result, even if a plurality of game balls pass through the V region 204, the highly suggestive effect is not executed unnecessarily, and the player appropriately recognizes that the game state shifts to an advantageous game state. can do. On the other hand, there may be cases where only one or two game balls pass through the V region 204 because the player has stopped launching the game ball halfway. In such a case, it is considered that the third game ball has passed through the V region 204 when a predetermined time has passed (S4914: Yes) within the V region passage detection period (S4902: Yes). (S4916: Yes, S4918), a highly accurate suggestion effect is executed (S4910).

  At this time, it is considered that the third game ball has passed through the V area 204 (the value of V is updated to 3). Even after passing through the V region 204, the value of V is counted up, so that the value of V does not match 3 (S4908: No).

  In addition, even if the predetermined time has elapsed (S4914: Yes), the value of V is 3 or more (S4916: No), and therefore the highly accurate suggestion effect is not executed again. As described above, even if a predetermined number (three) of predetermined game balls do not pass through the V region 204, if at least one game ball passes through the V region 204, 1 A highly accurate suggestion effect is executed only once.

  If no game ball passes through the V region 204, the game state does not shift to the high-probability time-short state, and thus the high-probability suggestion effect is not executed. Further, when the V region detection valid period ends (No in S4902), the value of V is reset to “0” (S4912). Thereby, even when the next probability variation big hit game is executed, the high probability suggestion effect is appropriately executed based on the passage of the third game ball through the V region 204 in the probability variation big hit game. The predetermined time described above may be set in any way, but is preferably set based on the relationship with the predetermined number V0. For example, the predetermined time may be set longer as the value of V0 is set larger. This is the end of the description of the V region passing effect process, and the description returns to the game-related command reception process 45 in FIGS. 44 and 45.

  Returning to FIG. 45, in S4506, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the ending command set in the processing of S1502 of FIG. 15 has been received. If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4506: Yes), the process proceeds to S4508. If it is determined that an ending command has not been received (S4506: No), the process is processed by the timer interrupt process of FIG. Return to (S4006: Abnormality-related command reception processing).

  In step S4508, the sub CPU 451 sets a command instructing execution of the big hit game ending effect in the sub RAM 453. This command set in the sub RAM 453 is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission processing in S4010 of FIG. Thereby, an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game is executed. Thereafter, the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (S4006: abnormality-related command reception processing) in FIG.

<Abnormality related command reception processing>
Based on FIGS. 50 and 51, the abnormality-related command reception processing performed in S4006 will be described. 50 and 51 are flowcharts showing the contents of the abnormality-related command reception process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. First, in S5000, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not an abnormal winning error start designation command has been received from the main control unit 400 (see S1802 in FIG. 18).

  If it is determined that an abnormal winning error start designation command has been received (S5000: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5002, executes an abnormal winning error process, and moves the process to S5004. On the other hand, when it is determined that the abnormal winning error start designation command has not been received (S5000: No), the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S5004.

<Sub-side abnormal winning error handling>
The contents of the abnormal winning error process performed in S5002 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54 are time charts showing the contents of the abnormal winning error processing executed when the production control unit 450 receives an abnormal winning error start designation command from the main control unit 400, and FIG. FIG. 53 shows a case where the number of occurrences of a winning error (the number of receptions of an abnormal winning error start designation command) is 1 or more and less than 10, and FIG. FIG. 54 shows a case where the number of occurrences of an abnormal winning error (the number of times of receiving an abnormal winning error start designation command) is 30 or more. The production control unit 450 cumulatively counts the number of abnormal winning error start designation commands received from the main control unit 400 from the time of power-on (restoration), that is, the number of occurrences of abnormal winning errors, and cumulatively counts them. The counted value is stored in the abnormality-related information storage area of the sub RAM 453.

  With reference to FIG. 52, first, the abnormal winning error process when the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error is 1 or more and less than 10 will be described. As described above, when an abnormal winning error occurs, the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400 outputs the external information terminal output (security) for 0.4 seconds (200 ms on via the game information output terminal board 424, and thereafter Off output for 200 ms, repeat if there are multiple output triggers). This notifies (outputs) that an abnormal winning error has occurred in an external device such as a hall computer.

  Here, when the number of occurrences of abnormal winning errors (for example, the number of occurrences of abnormal winning errors counted by the effect control unit 450 since the power-on of the gaming machine 100, the same applies hereinafter) is 1 or more and less than 10 times. The sub CPU 451 provides liquid crystal notification for notifying abnormality via the main display device 108 (hereinafter also simply referred to as liquid crystal notification) and audio notification for notifying abnormality via the speaker (voice output device) 138 (hereinafter simply referred to as voice notification). In other words, lamp notification for notifying abnormality via the frame decoration lamp 141 (hereinafter also simply referred to as lamp notification) remains uncontrolled (maintains the current state) as shown in FIG. When the output (security) has passed 0.4 seconds, the abnormal winning error notification (notification on the main side) ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the abnormal winning error process when the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error is 10 times or more and less than 30 will be described. Similarly to the above, when an abnormal winning error occurs, external information terminal output (security) is performed for 0.4 seconds as a notification on the main side. Here, when the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error is 10 times or more and less than 30 times, the sub CPU 451 transmits the abnormal winning error start designation command 1 to the lamp control unit 470, thereby notifying the lamp notification. The frame decoration lamp 141 flashes red for 250 ms on / off on the extinguished base (excluding the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol indicators) 106a and 106b) for 1 second (new error notification within 1 second) If the condition is satisfied, the process is performed for another 1 second).

  Further, the liquid crystal notification and the voice notification remain uncontrolled (maintained) as shown in FIG. 53 while the lamp notification performs the abnormal winning error notification. Therefore, in this case, the effect control unit 450 The sub CPU 451 transmits an abnormal winning error end specifying command to the lamp control unit 470 when one second has elapsed after receiving the abnormal winning error start specifying command (transmitting the abnormal winning error start specifying command 1). Thus, the abnormal winning error notification (lamp notification) by the sub-side ends.

  Note that the abnormal winning error start designation command 1 transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the lamp control unit 470 is “FE70H” similar to the abnormal winning error start designation command transmitted from the main CPU 401 to the effect control unit 450 described above. In addition, the abnormal winning error end designation command is set to “FF70H”, and is transmitted to the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the abnormal winning error process when the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error is 30 times or more will be described. Similarly to the above, when an abnormal winning error occurs, external information terminal output (security) is performed for 0.4 seconds as a notification on the main side. Here, when the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error is 30 times or more, the sub CPU 451 transmits the abnormal winning error start designation command 2 to the lamp control unit 470, so that the lamp notification is performed based on the all-off status ( The frame decoration lamp 141 is flashed in red for 250 ms on / off on the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol indicators) 106a and 106b) for 30 seconds (a new error notification condition is established within 30 seconds). If so, it is performed for another 30 seconds).

  Further, the sub CPU 451 transmits an abnormal winning error start designation command 2 to the image sound control unit 460, thereby performing voice notification regarding the abnormal winning error. In this case, the voice notification is “abnormal winning error” + siren 5 seconds repeatedly for 30 seconds regardless of the setting value of the hardware volume or software volume (if less than one set, one set is sounded). (If an error notification condition is newly established within 30 seconds, it is performed for another 30 seconds from that point).

  In addition, the liquid crystal notification remains uncontrolled (maintained) as shown in FIG. 54 while the voice notification and lamp notification perform the abnormal winning error notification. Therefore, in this case, the effect control unit 450 When 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the abnormal winning error start specifying command (transmitting the abnormal winning error start specifying command 2), the sub CPU 451 transmits an abnormal winning error end specifying command to the lamp control unit 470. Thus, the abnormal winning error notification (voice notification and lamp notification) by the sub-side ends.

  The abnormal winning error start designation command 2 transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the lamp control unit 470 is set to “FE71H”, and the abnormal winning error end designation command is set to “FF70H”. 40), respectively, is transmitted to the lamp controller 470.

  As apparent from the above description, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the abnormal winning error notification is performed, the abnormal winning error notification mode is changed according to the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error. Yes. That is, when the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error is 1 or more and less than 10 times, only an external output from the external information terminal on the main side is executed for 0.4 seconds as an abnormal winning error notification, and 10 or more times 30 If it is less than the number of times, as an abnormal winning error notification, an external output from the external information terminal on the main side is executed for 0.4 seconds, an error notification by lamp notification on the sub side is executed for 1 second, and the number of occurrences is 30. In the case of the number of times or more, as an abnormal winning error notification, an external output from the main-side external information terminal is executed for 0.4 seconds, and an error notification by the sub-side audio notification and lamp notification is executed for 30 seconds. It is configured.

  Generally, the manner of notifying an abnormal winning error is uniform regardless of the situation of the abnormal winning error, and it is difficult to deal with it appropriately. In that regard, according to the configuration of the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when an abnormal winning error occurs, if the abnormal winning error notification mode is confirmed, it is possible to grasp the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error. As a result, it is possible to appropriately deal with an abnormal winning error occurrence state. For example, if the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error is within a predetermined range, it is possible to take measures such as reducing wasteful measures by looking at the situation, or quickly responding if it is outside the predetermined range. Thereby, maintenance of the gaming machine 100 can be performed properly, and it can contribute to fraud suppression and early detection of the gaming machine 100.

  As described above, the production control unit 450 cumulatively stores the number of abnormal winning error start designation commands received from the main control unit 400 from the time of power-on (restoration), that is, the number of occurrences of abnormal winning errors in the sub RAM 453. Although stored in the abnormality related information storage area, the number of occurrences of the stored abnormal winning error is backed up by a predetermined backup power source when the power supply to the gaming machine 100 is stopped and the power supply is shut off. Then, the data of the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error may be stored and held (see the description of the sub-RAM 453 in FIG. 4A described above). With this configuration, even when the power is shut off, the number of occurrences of abnormal winning errors can be started from the number counted before the power is shut off. Furthermore, the accuracy of error notification related to an abnormal winning error is improved. Of course, it may be configured not to back up the number of occurrences of abnormal winning errors in consideration of cost-effectiveness, etc. In this case, if the power supply is cut off, after the power supply is restored, an abnormality is newly started from 0 The number of occurrences of winning prize errors is counted (the number of occurrences of abnormal winning errors is reset).

  Returning to FIG. 50, in S5004, it is determined whether or not a pan full error start designation command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S2006 in FIG. 20). If it is determined that the dish full tank error start designation command has been received (S5004: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5006, executes the dish full tank error start process, and moves the process to S5008. On the other hand, when it is determined that the dish full tank error start designation command has not been received (S5004: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5008.

  In step S5008, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a dish full tank error end designation command has been received (see step S2012 in FIG. 20). If it is determined that the dish full tank error end designation command has been received (S5008: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5010, executes the dish full tank error end process, and moves the process to S5012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the dish full tank error end designation command has not been received (S5008: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5012.

<Sub-side dish full error processing>
The contents of the dish full tank error process performed in S5006 and S5010 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a time chart showing the contents of the dish full tank error process executed when the production control section 450 receives a dish full tank error start designation command and a dish full tank error end designation command from the main control section 400.

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the production control unit 450 receives the dish full tank error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits a dish full tank error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460, thereby generating a dish full tank error. Such liquid crystal notification and voice notification are performed. In this case, the LCD alert displays the message “Pull out the full tray error” on the screen. This character display is displayed at a position that is easily visible to the player (for example, in the vicinity of a round display if it is a big hit). In addition, the voice notification repeats the voice “please remove the ball” (sounds at least one set). At this time, the volume is 80% of the effective volume setting value (hardware volume or software volume), and silence for 5 seconds is provided between the sounds. The normal sound is not controlled.

  In addition, if a full plate error occurs during a big hit, the voice notification is performed only during the big hit round (for example, after 1 second from the start of the big hit round). Then it is not executed. Here, the voice notification is in a state in which the state of the big winning device is difficult to win the game ball even during the big hit round (for example, as described in the description of FIG. 5A, the first big winning device When 120 becomes a so-called “pakapaka state” in which the short-time release performed at 4R is repeated a predetermined number of times, it is configured not to be executed during the period (the operation period in which the game ball of the big winning device is difficult to win). Yes. The reason for this is as follows.

  That is, the dish full tank error is most likely to occur when a big hit state is reached in which a large number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in a conventional gaming machine, when a dish full tank error occurs during a big hit, In order to prompt the player to remove the ball from the lower plate 129, voice notification is performed regardless of the open mode (conversion mode) of the big winning device. However, even if the player is in a big hit, the opening or ending big winning device is closed, or the game ball of the big winning device during the round is difficult to win ("Pakapaka state"), that is, If the sound notification is made during the period when there is no payout in which the prize ball is not paid out during the big hit, the sound notification related to this dish full tank error which is executed despite the absence of the turn is annoying, and as a result, I feel uncomfortable.

  In that regard, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, during such a no-payout period in which the winning ball during the big hit is not paid out, the voice notification related to the dish full tank error is not performed, As a result, the player does not feel uncomfortable. That is, the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment can perform voice notification related to the dish full tank error according to the open mode of the big winning device (variable winning device), and as a result, the gaming property is improved. In addition, since the voice notification is not performed, there is also an effect of making the operation of the large winning device that makes it difficult for the game ball to win a prize (the player concentrates on the operation), and the game performance is further improved. .

  In addition, the operation mode in which the game ball of the big winning device during this round is difficult to win is not limited to the above-described “pakapaka state”, and it is difficult to win compared to the normal opening mode of the big winning device. As long as it is a mode, any mode may be used.

  Therefore, as a big hit that makes it difficult for the big prize device to win a prize during the round, a so-called rank-up bonus (an action that makes it difficult to win a predetermined round and the round ends with the action, A big hit that says whether it will continue (rank up) after that action or a jump-up bonus (make it difficult to win a given round, and the round will end in that action, or another action will continue after that action. An example is a jackpot called a jackpot that asks if you want to jump up to a bonus. On the other hand, in such a big hit, during the operation period in which it is difficult to win the prize winning device when ranking up or jumping up, conversely, it is possible to execute the voice notification related to the dish full tank error. Good. With this configuration, unlike the normal case, voice notification is not performed, so that the next easy-to-win winning device (long open) is confirmed, that is, the rank advancement or jump-up confirmation notice is also made. As a result, the game preference is improved.

  Further, the lamp notification remains uncontrolled (maintained) as shown in FIG. 55 while the voice notification and the liquid crystal notification perform the dish full tank error notification. Accordingly, the dish full tank error notification is performed when the sub CPU 451 transmits the dish full tank error end designation command to the image sound control unit 460 when the production control unit 450 receives the dish full tank error end designation command. The dish full tank error notification (voice notification and liquid crystal notification) is completed. In FIG. 55, as an example, the time point when the production control unit 450 receives the dish full error end designation command indicates a case where 30 seconds or more have elapsed since the dish full tank error start designation command was received. Further, in this dish full tank error notification, the external information terminal output as the notification on the main side is not executed.

  It should be noted that “FE00H” is set as the dish full tank error start designation command transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460, and “FF00H” is set as the dish full tank error end designation command. 40), respectively, is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460.

  Returning to FIG. 50, in S5012, it is determined whether a door opening error start designation command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S2106 in FIG. 21). If it is determined that the door opening error start designation command has been received (S5012: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5014, executes the door opening error start process, and moves the process to S5016. On the other hand, if it is determined that the door opening error start designation command has not been received (S5012: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5016.

  In step S5016, the sub CPU 451 determines whether a door opening error end designation command has been received (see step S2112 in FIG. 21). If it is determined that the door opening error end designation command has been received (S5016: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5018, executes the door opening error end process, and moves the process to S5020. On the other hand, if it is determined that the door opening error end designation command has not been received (S5016: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5020.

<Sub-side door opening error handling>
The contents of the door opening error process performed in S5014 and S5018 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57 are time charts showing details of door opening error processing executed when the production control unit 450 receives a door opening error start designation command and a door opening error end designation command from the main control unit 400. FIG. FIG. 56 shows a case where the door opening error ends (when the door opening error end designation command is received) within 5 minutes after the occurrence of the door opening error (when the door opening error start designation command is received). 57 shows a case where the door opening error has ended (at the time of receiving the door opening error end designation command) after 5 minutes or more have passed since the occurrence of the door opening error (at the time of receiving the door opening error start designation command).

  With reference to FIG. 56, first, door opening error processing when the door opening error is completed in less than 5 minutes from the occurrence of the door opening error will be described. When the production control unit 450 receives the door opening error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits a door opening error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, thereby sub-related to the door opening error. Side liquid crystal notification, voice notification and lamp notification. In this case, the liquid crystal notification displays the characters “door open error” on the screen. Also, the voice notification repeats the voice “door is open”. At this time, the volume is set to the volume MAX regardless of the setting value of the hardware volume or the software volume, and silence for 5 seconds is provided between the sounds. In addition, in the lamp notification, the frame decoration lamp 141 blinks red on and off for 250 ms on the all-off base (except for the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol display) 106a and 106b). At this time, if the frame gimmick (retractable, patrol lamp motor, and chance button motor) is operating by the above-described gimmick monitoring process, the frame gimmick is returned to the origin position to stop the operation (see S4310 in FIG. 43). ).

  When the door opening error end designation command is received within 5 minutes from the occurrence of the door opening error, that is, five minutes after the production control unit 450 receives the door opening error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 The door opening error end designation command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. Then, when the liquid crystal notification receives the door opening error end designation command, the notification of the door opening error is immediately ended. Further, the voice notification ends the notification of the door opening error when 5 seconds have elapsed after receiving the door opening error end designation command. In addition, the lamp notification ends the notification of the door opening error when 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the door opening error end designation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, door opening error processing will be described in the case where the door opening error ends after 5 minutes or more have passed since the door opening error occurred. When the production control unit 450 receives the door opening error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 controls the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 in the same manner as described above (when the door opening error ends in less than 5 minutes). By transmitting a door opening error start designation command, liquid crystal notification, sound notification, and lamp notification on the sub side related to the door opening error are performed. Since the notification contents of the liquid crystal notification, voice notification, and lamp notification in this case are the same as those described above (when the door opening error ends in less than 5 minutes), description thereof is omitted here.

  Here, the liquid crystal notification and the lamp notification are performed in the same manner as described above (when the door opening error ends in less than 5 minutes) and when the effect control unit 450 receives the door opening error end specifying command and the door opening error end specifying command. When 30 seconds have passed since the reception of the message, the door opening error notification is terminated. However, the voice notification ends the notification of the door opening error when 5 minutes have elapsed after receiving the door opening error start specifying command before receiving the door opening error end specifying command.

  Note that “FE01H” is set for the door opening error start designation command transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the sub CPU 451, and “FF01H” is set for the door opening error end designation command. Then, it is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, respectively, by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40). Further, in this door opening error notification, the external information terminal output as the main notification is not executed.

  As is apparent from the above description, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the door opening error notification is performed, the liquid crystal notification is performed after the effect control unit 450 receives the door opening error start designation command. The period until the error end designation command is received, that is, the period in which the door opening detection means (glass frame opening switch 483a or inner frame opening switch 483b) detects the opening of the door (glass frame 150 or inner frame 170) continues. To inform that the door is open. However, in the lamp notification and voice notification (when the door opening error ends in less than 5 minutes), the production control unit 450 receives the door opening error start specifying command after receiving the door opening error start specifying command. In addition to the period in which the predetermined time is added to the period, that is, the period in which the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door, even after the door opening detection means no longer detects the opening of the door, the predetermined period is It is comprised so that it may alert | report that the door is open continuously. That is, the door opening error notification is configured not to end completely until a predetermined time elapses after the effect control unit 450 receives the door opening error end designation command. The reason for this is as follows.

  That is, one of the important purposes of the door opening error notification is that the door (the glass frame 150 or the inner frame 170) is opened and the game board 102 in the gaming machine 100, the main control unit 400 and the like are illegal. The hall is to find out early what it is going to do. Therefore, when such a fraud is made, the door is closed and the cause of the error disappears (the door opening error end designation command is received). In other words, the door opening error notification is issued at the same time as the fraud ends. When it is finished, the door opening error notification is finished when the clerk rushes, and as a result, the inconvenience that the fraudulent discovery is delayed and the unauthorized person is missed occurs, and the hall suffers a huge disadvantage become. That is, if the door opening detection means stops detecting the opening of the door and immediately terminates the door opening error notification, it becomes difficult to properly detect fraud that is performed by opening the door.

  In that respect, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when such a fraud to open the door is performed, the door opening error notification is detected by the door opening detection means by the lamp notification and voice notification. Even after it has stopped, it is configured to notify that the door is still open for a predetermined period as evidence of fraud, and as a result, the fraud performed by opening the door is properly detected. Can contribute to improving the security of the gaming machine 100. In particular, the lamp notification is reported relatively longer than the voice notification, and the door opening error notification due to the light emission of the lamp notification has an advantage that an unauthorized person is difficult to notice the door opening error notification. Yes, and the security of the technical machine 100 is further improved.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when performing door opening error notification, as described above, at least the effect control unit 450 receives the door opening error start designation command for the liquid crystal notification and the lamp notification. The door opening detection means (the glass frame opening switch 483a or the inner frame opening switch 483b) detects the period from the time when the door opening error end designation command is received, that is, the opening of the door (glass frame 150 or inner frame 170). Informs that the door is open during the period. However, in the case of voice notification (when the door opening error ends after 5 minutes or more), the production control unit 450 receives the door opening error start specifying command before receiving the door opening error end specifying command. When 5 minutes have passed, the door opening error notification is terminated. That is, the voice notification indicates that the door is opened regardless of the detection result of the door opening by the door opening detecting means when a predetermined period has elapsed since the door opening detecting means started detecting the opening of the door. The notification is stopped. The reason for this is as follows.

  That is, the opening of the door (the glass frame 150 or the inner frame 170) in the gaming machine 100 is not illegal, but maintenance / inspection of various devices provided in the gaming machine 100 outside the business hours, cleaning of the gaming board 102, etc. It is common for salesclerks to solve troubles such as clogging, regardless of business hours. However, when the door is opened to perform maintenance / inspection or cleaning of the gaming machine 100 other than such illegal ones, if the door opening error notification is executed, the door opening error notification is felt troublesome, and particularly the volume MAX. The sound notification that rings at a large volume of the sound becomes noisy and extremely troublesome, and there is a problem that workability is lowered.

  In that respect, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, even when the above-described door opening performed by a hall other than the unauthorized is performed, the sound notification in the door opening error notification is performed by the door opening detection means. When the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the door opening detection, even before the production control unit 450 receives the door opening error end designation command, that is, the door opening detecting means Regardless of the detection result, the notification that the door is forcibly opened unconditionally is stopped. As a result, in the work such as maintenance / inspection and cleaning of the gaming machine 100 performed by the hall opening the door, it is possible to reduce annoying voice notification of the door opening error notification, and to suppress the accompanying workability deterioration. It becomes possible to do. That is, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably notify the door opening error.

  Returning to FIG. 50, in S5020, it is determined whether or not a payout state error start designation command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S2206 in FIG. 22). If it is determined that a payout state error start designation command has been received (S5020: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5022, executes a payout state error start process, and moves the process to S5024. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payout state error start designation command has not been received (S5020: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5024.

  In S5024, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a payout state error end designation command has been received (see S2212 in FIG. 22). If it is determined that the payout state error end designation command has been received (S5024: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5026, executes the payout state error end process, and moves the process to S5028. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payout state error end designation command has not been received (S5024: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5028.

<Sub-side payout status error processing>
The contents of the payout state error process performed in S5022 and S5026 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a time chart showing the contents of the payout state error process executed when the effect control unit 450 receives a payout state error start designation command and a payout state error end designation command from the main control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the production control unit 450 receives the payout state error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits a payout state error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. The liquid crystal notification and lamp notification related to the payout state error are performed. In this case, the LCD alert displays the characters “Please call me” on the screen. In addition, in the lamp notification, the frame decoration lamp 141 blinks red on and off for 250 ms on the all-off base (except for the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol display) 106a and 106b).

  In addition, the voice notification remains uncontrolled (maintained) as shown in FIG. 58 while the liquid crystal notification and the lamp notification perform the payout state error notification. Accordingly, in the payout state error notification, when the production control unit 450 receives the payout state error end designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits a payout state error end designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. Thus, the notification of the payout state error (liquid crystal notification and lamp notification) by the sub-side ends.

  It should be noted that “FE02H” is set for the payout state error start designation command transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the sub CPU 451, and “FF02H” is set for the payout state error end designation command. Then, it is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, respectively, by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40). In this payout state error notification, the external information terminal output as the main notification is not executed.

  Returning to FIG. 50, in S5028, it is determined whether a switch abnormality error start designation command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S2406 in FIG. 24). If it is determined that the switch abnormality error start designation command has been received (S5028: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5030, executes the switch abnormality error start process, and moves the process to S5032. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switch abnormality error start designation command has not been received (S5028: No), the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S5032.

  In step S5032, the sub CPU 451 determines whether a switch abnormal error end designation command has been received (see step S2412 in FIG. 24). If it is determined that the switch abnormal error end designation command has been received (S5032: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5034, executes the switch abnormal error end process, and moves the process to S5036. On the other hand, when it is determined that the switch abnormal error end designation command has not been received (S5032: No), the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S5036.

<Sub switch error error processing>
The contents of the switch abnormality error processing performed in S5030 and S5034 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a time chart showing the contents of the switch abnormality error process executed when the effect control unit 450 receives a switch abnormality error start designation command and a switch abnormality error end designation command from the main control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the production control unit 450 receives the switch abnormality error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits a switch abnormality error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. Liquid crystal notification, voice notification, and lamp notification related to a switch abnormality error are performed. The liquid crystal notification in this case displays the characters “switch abnormal error” on the screen. In addition, the voice notification is “switch abnormal error” + siren 5 seconds repeatedly with the volume MAX regardless of the setting value of the hardware volume or software volume (if less than one set, one set sounds). In addition, in the lamp notification, the frame decoration lamp 141 blinks red on and off for 250 ms on the all-off base (except for the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol display) 106a and 106b).

  The switch abnormality error notification is made when the production control unit 450 receives the switch abnormality error end designation command, and the sub CPU 451 transmits the switch abnormality error end designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. By doing so, the notification of the switch abnormality error (liquid crystal notification, voice notification, and lamp notification) by the sub-side ends.

  It should be noted that “FE03H” is set for the switch abnormality error start designation command transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, and “FF03H” is set for the switch abnormality error end designation command. Then, it is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, respectively, by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40). Further, in this switch abnormality error notification, the external information terminal output as the main notification is not executed.

  Returning to FIG. 50, in S5036, it is determined whether or not a magnet detection error start designation command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S2602 in FIG. 26). If it is determined that the magnet detection error start designation command is received (S5036: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5038, executes the magnet detection error process, and moves the process to S5040. On the other hand, if it is determined that the magnet detection error start designation command has not been received (S5036: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5040.

<Sub-side magnet detection error handling>
The contents of the magnet detection error process performed in S5038 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a time chart showing the contents of magnet detection error processing executed when the production control unit 450 receives a magnet detection error start designation command from the main control unit 400.

  Referring to FIG. 60, as described above, when a magnet detection error occurs, the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400 outputs an external information terminal output (security) for 300 seconds (for 200 ms during the game information output terminal plate 424). Turn on output, then turn off for 200 ms, and repeat if there are multiple output triggers). This notifies (outputs) that a magnet detection error has occurred in an external device such as a hall computer.

  When the production control unit 450 receives the magnet detection error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits a magnet detection error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, thereby liquid crystal related to the magnet detection error. Notification, voice notification, and lamp notification are performed. In this case, the liquid crystal notification displays the characters “magnet detection” on the screen for 300 seconds (if an error notification condition is newly established within 300 seconds, it is performed for another 300 seconds from that point). In addition, the voice notification is “magnet detected” + siren is performed for 30 seconds with the volume MAX regardless of the setting value of the hardware volume or software volume (if the error notification condition is newly established within 30 seconds) For another 30 seconds from that point). In addition, the lamp notification is performed for 300 seconds by blinking the frame decoration lamp 141 on and off for 250 ms on the all extinguishing base (except for the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol display) 106a and 106b) (on and off for 300 ms). (If an error notification condition is newly established within 2 seconds, it is performed for 300 seconds from that point).

  Then, 30 seconds and 300 seconds have elapsed since the production control unit 450 received the magnet detection error start designation command (transmits the magnet detection error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470). At that time, the sub CPU 451 transmits a magnet detection error end designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, thereby informing the magnet detection error by the sub side (liquid crystal notification, voice notification, and lamp notification). Ends.

  It should be noted that “FE04H” is set for the magnet detection error start designation command transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, and “FF04H” is set for the magnet detection error end designation command. Then, it is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, respectively, by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40).

  Returning to FIG. 50, in S5040, it is determined whether or not a discharge error start designation command has been received from the main control unit 400 (see S2710 in FIG. 27). If it is determined that a discharge error start designation command has been received (S5040: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5042, executes the discharge error process, and moves the process to S5100 (see FIG. 51). On the other hand, when it is determined that the discharge error start designation command has not been received (S5040: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5100.

<Sub discharge error handling>
The contents of the discharge error process performed in S5042 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a time chart showing the contents of the discharge error process executed when the production control unit 450 receives a discharge error start designation command from the main control unit 400.

  Referring to FIG. 61, as described above, when a discharge error occurs, the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400 outputs an external information terminal output (security) via the game information output terminal plate 424 to supply power to the gaming machine 100. When the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on to continuously turn on the output until the memory of the main RAM 403 is cleared. This notifies (outputs) that a discharge error has occurred in an external device such as a hall computer.

  When the production control unit 450 receives the discharge error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits a discharge error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, thereby liquid crystal notification and sound related to the discharge error. Notification and lamp notification are performed. The liquid crystal notification in this case displays the characters “discharge error” on the screen for 30 seconds (if an error notification condition is newly established within 30 seconds, it is performed for another 30 seconds from that point). Also, the voice notification is “discharge error” + siren for 30 seconds with the volume MAX regardless of the setting value of the hardware volume or software volume (if the error notification condition is newly established within 30 seconds, For another 30 seconds from that point). Further, the lamp notification is performed for 30 seconds by flashing the frame decoration lamp 141 on and off for 250 ms on the all extinguished base (excluding the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol indicators) 106a and 106b) (30 (If the error notification condition is newly established within 2 seconds, it is performed for another 30 seconds from that point).

  Then, when 30 seconds have elapsed after the production control unit 450 receives the discharge error start designation command (transmits the discharge error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470), the sub CPU 451 Transmits the discharge error end designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, and thereby the discharge error notification (liquid crystal notification, voice notification, and lamp notification) by the sub-side ends.

  Note that the discharge error start designation command transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 is set to “FE05H”, and the discharge error end designation command is set to “FF05H”. The image is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40), respectively.

  Returning to FIG. 51, in S5100, it is determined whether or not a radio wave detection error start designation command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S2802 in FIG. 28). If it is determined that the radio wave detection error start designation command has been received (S5100: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5102, executes the radio wave detection error process, and moves the process to S5104. On the other hand, if it is determined that the radio wave detection error start designation command has not been received (S5100: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5104.

<Sub-side radio wave detection error handling>
The contents of the radio wave detection error process performed in S5102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a time chart showing the contents of radio wave detection error processing executed when the effect control unit 450 receives a radio wave detection error start designation command from the main control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 62, when the production control unit 450 receives a radio wave detection error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits a radio wave detection error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. The sub-side performs radio wave detection error notification, that is, liquid crystal notification, sound notification and lamp notification related to the radio wave detection error.

  Here, the radio detection error notification by the sub-side is executed when the frequency of occurrence of the radio detection error (the number of reception of the radio detection error start designation command) is 5 times or more (it is not executed when the frequency is less than 5). It has become. This is in consideration of malfunction due to noise of the radio wave sensor 427 or the like.

  The liquid crystal notification relating to the radio wave detection error displays the characters “radio wave detection” on the screen for 300 seconds (if an error notification condition is newly established within 300 seconds, it is performed for another 300 seconds from that point). In addition, voice notification is performed with “Volume detected” + siren for 30 seconds at volume MAX regardless of the setting value of hardware volume or software volume (if error notification condition is newly established within 30 seconds) For another 30 seconds from that point). In addition, the lamp notification is performed for 300 seconds by blinking the frame decoration lamp 141 on and off for 250 ms on the all extinguishing base (except for the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol display) 106a and 106b) (on and off for 300 ms). (If an error notification condition is newly established within 2 seconds, it is performed for 300 seconds from that point).

  Then, 30 seconds and 300 seconds have elapsed since the effect control unit 450 received the radio wave detection error start designation command (transmits the radio wave detection error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470). At this time, the sub CPU 451 transmits a radio wave detection error end designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, thereby informing the sub side of the radio wave detection error (liquid crystal notification, audio notification, and lamp notification). Ends.

  Note that “FE06H” is set for the radio wave detection error start designation command transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, and “FF06H” is set for the radio wave detection error end designation command. Then, it is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, respectively, by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40). Further, in this radio wave detection error notification, the external information terminal output as the main notification is not executed.

  Returning to FIG. 51, in S5104, it is determined whether or not a discharge ball check error start designation command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S2906 in FIG. 29). If it is determined that a discharge ball check error start designation command has been received (S5104: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5106, executes a discharge ball check error process, and moves the process to S5108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the discharge ball check error start designation command has not been received (S5104: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5108.

<Sub-side discharge ball check error handling>
The contents of the discharge ball check error process performed in S5106 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a time chart showing the contents of the discharge ball check error process executed when the effect control unit 450 receives the discharge ball check error start designation command from the main control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 63, when the production control unit 450 receives the discharge ball check error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits a discharge ball check error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. Thus, liquid crystal notification, sound notification, and lamp notification related to the discharge ball confirmation error are performed. In this case, the liquid crystal notification is displayed on the screen for 300 seconds with the characters “Large winning device discharge error” (if an error notification condition is newly established within 300 seconds, it is performed for another 300 seconds from that point). Also, the voice notification is “discharge error” + siren for 30 seconds with the volume MAX regardless of the setting value of the hardware volume or software volume (if the error notification condition is newly established within 30 seconds, For another 30 seconds from that point). In addition, the lamp notification is performed for 300 seconds by blinking the frame decoration lamp 141 on and off for 250 ms on the all extinguishing base (except for the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol display) 106a and 106b) (on and off for 300 ms). (If an error notification condition is newly established within 2 seconds, it is performed for 300 seconds from that point).

  Then, 30 seconds and 300 seconds have elapsed after the production control unit 450 receives the discharge ball check error start designation command (transmits the discharge ball check error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470). When the time has elapsed, the sub CPU 451 transmits a discharge ball check error end designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, thereby informing the sub side of the discharge ball check error (liquid crystal notification, voice notification). And lamp notification) ends.

  Note that “FE07H” is set as the discharge ball check error start designation command transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, and the discharge ball check error end designation command is “FF07H”. Is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40), respectively. Further, in this discharge ball check error notification, the external information terminal output as the main notification is not executed.

  Returning to FIG. 51, in S5108, it is determined whether or not a solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command is received from the main controller 400 (see S3004 in FIG. 30). If it is determined that the solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command has been received (S5108: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5110, executes the solenoid photosensor abnormality error process, and moves the process to S5112. On the other hand, if it is determined that the solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command has not been received (S5108: No), the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S5112.

<Sub-solenoid photosensor error error handling>
The contents of the solenoid photosensor abnormality error process performed in S5110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a time chart showing the contents of solenoid photosensor abnormality error processing executed when the production control unit 450 receives a solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command from the main control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 64, when the production control unit 450 receives the solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 sends a solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. By transmitting, notification of the solenoid photosensor abnormality error by the sub side, that is, liquid crystal notification and lamp notification related to the solenoid photosensor abnormality error is performed.

  Here, the solenoid photosensor abnormality error notification by the sub-side is executed when the number of occurrences of the solenoid photosensor abnormality error (the number of reception of the solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command) is 8 times or more (less than 8 times). If it does not run). This is in consideration of malfunction due to noise or the like of the V region photosensor 420.

  The liquid crystal notification related to the solenoid photosensor abnormality error is displayed for 300 seconds on the screen with the word “Large winning device abnormality” (if an error notification condition is newly established within 300 seconds, it is performed for another 300 seconds from that point. ). In addition, the lamp notification is performed for 300 seconds by blinking the frame decoration lamp 141 on and off for 250 ms on the all extinguishing base (except for the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol display) 106a and 106b) (on and off for 300 ms). (If an error notification condition is newly established within 2 seconds, it is performed for 300 seconds from that point).

  Also, the voice notification remains uncontrolled (maintained) as shown in FIG. 64 while the liquid crystal notification and the lamp notification perform the solenoid photosensor abnormality error notification. Therefore, when the solenoid photosensor abnormality error notification is made, the production control unit 450 receives the solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command (transmits the solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470). ), The sub CPU 451 transmits a solenoid photosensor abnormality error end designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, so that the solenoid photosensor abnormality by the sub side is completed. Error notification (liquid crystal notification and lamp notification) ends.

  It should be noted that “FE08H” is set as the solenoid photosensor abnormality error start designation command transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, and the discharge ball check error end designation command is “FF08H”. Is set, and is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40), respectively. Further, in this solenoid photosensor abnormality error notification, the external information terminal output as the main notification is not executed.

  Returning to FIG. 51, in S5112, it is determined whether an impact detection error start designation command has been received from the main control unit 400 (see S3106 in FIG. 31). If it is determined that an impact detection error start designation command has been received (S5112: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5114, executes the impact detection error process, and moves the process to S5116. On the other hand, if it is determined that the shock detection error start designation command has not been received (S5112: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5116.

<Sub-side impact detection error handling>
The contents of the impact detection error process performed in S5114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a time chart showing the contents of impact detection error processing executed when the effect control unit 450 receives an impact detection error start designation command from the main control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 65, when the production control unit 450 receives an impact detection error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits an impact detection error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. Liquid crystal notification, voice notification and lamp notification related to the impact detection error are performed. The liquid crystal notification in this case displays the characters “impact detection” on the screen for 300 seconds (if an error notification condition is newly established within 300 seconds, it is performed for another 300 seconds from that point). In addition, the voice notification is “impact detected” + siren is performed for 30 seconds with the volume MAX regardless of the setting value of the hardware volume or software volume (if the error notification condition is newly established within 30 seconds) For another 30 seconds from that point). In addition, the lamp notification is performed for 300 seconds by blinking the frame decoration lamp 141 on and off for 250 ms on the all extinguishing base (except for the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol display) 106a and 106b) (on and off for 300 ms). (If an error notification condition is newly established within 2 seconds, it is performed for 300 seconds from that point).

  Then, 30 seconds and 300 seconds have elapsed since the effect control unit 450 received the impact detection error start designation command (transmits the impact detection error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470). At that time, the sub CPU 451 transmits an impact detection error end designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, thereby reporting the impact detection error by the sub side (liquid crystal notification, sound notification, and lamp notification). Ends.

  It should be noted that “FE09H” is set as the impact detection error start designation command transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, and “FF09H” is set as the discharge ball check error end designation command. It is set and transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40), respectively. Further, in this discharge ball check error notification, the external information terminal output as the main notification is not executed.

  Returning to FIG. 51, in S5116, it is determined whether an abnormal V winning error start designation command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S3204 in FIG. 32). If it is determined that the abnormal V winning error start designation command is received (S5116: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5118, executes the abnormal V winning error process, and moves the process to S5120. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormal V winning error start designation command has not been received (S5116: No), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5120.

<Sub-side abnormal V winning error handling>
The contents of the abnormal V winning error process performed in S5118 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a time chart showing the contents of the abnormal V winning error process executed when the effect control unit 450 receives an abnormal V winning error start designation command from the main control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 66, when the production control unit 450 receives the abnormal V prize error start designation command, the sub CPU 451 transmits an abnormal V prize error start designation command to the lamp control unit 470, thereby causing the abnormal V prize error start designation command. Lamp notification related to error is performed. The lamp notification in this case is completely turned off (except for the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol indicators) 106a and 106b). The lamp notification related to the abnormal V winning error is executed with priority over the lamp notification related to other errors (non-priority over power-on / recovery).

  That is, among the lamp notifications related to the errors described above, abnormal winning errors (except when the number of occurrences is 1 or more and less than 10 times), door opening errors, payout state errors, switch error errors, magnet detection errors, discharge errors, Lamp notifications related to radio wave detection errors, discharge ball check errors, solenoid photo sensor abnormality errors, impact detection errors, and winning frequency abnormality errors described later are all in the same mode by blinking red for a predetermined time with the frame decoration lamp 141 on / off for 250 ms. Although the lamp notification related to the abnormal V winning error is performed, the lamp control unit 470 receives the abnormal V winning error start designation command even when the lamp notification related to these errors is executed. At this point, the lamp notification related to these errors is immediately stopped and all lights are turned off (except for the 4th pattern). And it has a configuration that.

  Further, the liquid crystal notification and the voice notification remain uncontrolled (currently maintained) as shown in FIG. 66 while the lamp notification performs the abnormal V winning error notification. Then, the lamp notification related to the abnormal V prize error is terminated when the effect control unit 450 transmits an error end designation command to the image sound control unit 460 or the lamp control unit 470 like the error described above. Instead, the hall shuts off the power of the gaming machine 100 and then ends when the power is turned on (when the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on when the power is turned on and the memory of the main RAM 403 is cleared). It has become. In the abnormal V prize error notification, the external information terminal output as the main notification is not executed.

  As is apparent from the above description, the abnormal V winning error notification is performed even though the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state, that is, even though the second big winning device is in a state where it is impossible to win. First, the error notification is executed when the game ball passes through the V region 204, and such a situation is a very serious disadvantage for the hall. This is a mode different from the notification (a conspicuous mode in which all lights are turned off), and is notified prior to other error notifications, and continues to be notified until the next storage in the main RAM 403 is cleared. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the prevention and early detection of fraud related to an abnormal V prize error.

  Returning to FIG. 51, in S5120, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the normal winning device winning command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S713 in FIG. 7). When it is determined that the normal winning device winning command is received (S5120: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S5122, executes the winning frequency abnormality error process, and the process is the timer interrupt process (S4008) in FIG. : Input device processing). On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal winning device winning command has not been received (S5120: No), the sub CPU 451 returns the processing to the timer interrupt processing (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown processing) in FIG.

<Winning frequency abnormality error processing>
The contents of the winning frequency abnormality error process performed in S5122 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the winning frequency abnormality error process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450, FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the error determination process for the winning frequency abnormality error, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the contents of a winning frequency abnormality error process executed when the effect control unit 450 determines that the winning frequency abnormality error has occurred. FIG.

  The winning frequency error error is the other error mentioned above, that is, abnormal winning error, dish full error, door open error, payout status error, switch error error, magnet detection error, discharge error, radio wave detection error, discharge ball check error, Unlike the solenoid photosensor abnormality error, the impact detection error, and the abnormality V winning error, an error start command related to the occurrence of an error from the main control unit 400 is an error that is not transmitted to the effect control unit 450. That is, the process related to the winning frequency abnormality error is a process in which nothing is executed on the main side, and error determination is performed on whether or not the winning frequency is abnormal only on the sub side.

  Referring to FIG. 67, based on receiving the normal winning device winning command, sub CPU 451, in S6700, all storage areas (9 pieces of winning information RAM provided in the abnormality-related information storage area of sub RAM 453). ) To determine whether there is remaining time information. When it is determined that there is remaining time information (S6700: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S6704, and when it is determined that there is no remaining time information (S6700: No), the process moves to S6702.

  In step S6702, the sub CPU 451 sets a remaining time counter (80 seconds) in the storage area of the set winning information RAM. As described above, the set remaining time counter is the reference time (for example, 20 seconds or 80 seconds set in the RAM clear preparation screen (FIG. 35). In FIG. 68, the reference time is 80 seconds. The set reference time is counted down by S4007 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 40) of the effect control unit 450. In other words, the remaining time counter set in the winning information RAM is a counter for counting the elapsed time after the game ball has won the normal winning device 122 to the reference time set at the maximum. When the process of S6702 is finished, the sub CPU 451 returns the process to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 40 (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown process).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 68, the winning information RAM has nine buffer areas (buffer areas (1) to (9)) as storage areas, and the head of the buffer area (buffer area (1)). The tail (buffer area (9)) is connected, and is configured as a ring buffer capable of accumulating a plurality of past data for a certain period by overwriting the oldest contents with the latest contents. Accordingly, the ring buffer stores the elapsed time since winning the past nine normal winning devices 122. That is, the winning information RAM is configured to store an elapsed time from winning the normal winning device 122 for every winning of a predetermined number of game balls to the normal winning device 122, respectively. Therefore, in the determination of S6700, if the remaining time counter is set in nine buffer areas, the answer is Yes. If even one of the buffer areas is not set, the answer is No.

  In S6704, when the sub CPU 451 receives the normal winning device winning command, the remaining time stored in the buffer area set in the winning information RAM (the remaining time stored oldest, the buffer area (5 in FIG. 68)). )) Is other than 0, that is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time after winning the normal winning device 122 has reached the reference time. If it is determined that the remaining time is other than 0 (S6704: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S6706, and if it is determined that the remaining time is 0 (S6704: No), the process moves to S6718.

  In S6706, the sub CPU 451 clears all the buffer areas of the winning information RAM, moves the process to S6708, and clears the value of the normal winning counter. Then, the process proceeds to S6710, and the sub CPU 451 updates (+1) the value of the abnormal winning counter, and the process proceeds to S6712.

  Here, when the effect control unit 450 performs the winning frequency abnormality error process, the abnormality-related information storage area of the sub RAM 453 is provided with a normal winning counter and an abnormal winning counter in addition to the winning information RAM. . The normal prize counter and the abnormal prize counter are counters that start from 0 and do not take a negative value (become 0 when the value is negative) and become an integer (0 and a positive integer). .

  Thus, when the determination in S6704 is Yes, the remaining time is not 0 in all the buffer areas, that is, the elapsed time since winning the normal winning device 122 has not reached the reference time. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the winning frequency of the game ball to the normal winning device 122 is abnormal. In other words, this means that at least nine game balls have been won in the normal winning device 122 within the reference time. Each time this winning frequency abnormality determination is made, the value of the normal winning counter is cleared and the value of the abnormal winning counter is incremented (+1).

  In S6712, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the value of the abnormal winning counter is less than 5, and if it is not less than 5 (S6712: No), that is, if the value of the abnormal winning counter becomes 5, the process is performed in S6714. If it is less than 5 (S6712: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 40 (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown process). Then, the sub CPU 451 clears the value of the abnormal winning counter in S6714, moves the processing to S6716, and sets a winning frequency abnormal error start designation command for notifying that a winning frequency abnormal error has occurred. FIG. 68A schematically shows the flow of processing from S6706 to S6716 when it is determined Yes in S6704, that is, the flow of processing when an error occurs in the winning frequency abnormality error processing. . When the processing of S6716 is completed, the sub CPU 451 returns the processing to the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 40 (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown processing).

  The specific notification content of the winning frequency abnormality error will be described here with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, when the winning frequency abnormality error start designation command is set in S6716 in the above winning frequency abnormality error process, the sub CPU 451 makes a winning frequency abnormality to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. By transmitting the error start designation command, the sub-side notifies of the winning frequency abnormality error, that is, the liquid crystal notification, the sound notification and the lamp notification related to the winning frequency abnormality error.

  The liquid crystal notification related to the winning frequency abnormality error displays the characters “winning frequency abnormality error” on the screen for 300 seconds (if an error notification condition is newly established within 300 seconds, it is performed for 300 seconds from that point). . In addition, the voice alert is “Please call a staff member” + siren for 30 seconds with the volume MAX regardless of the setting value of the hardware volume or software volume (if the error alert condition is newly established within 30 seconds) , For another 30 seconds from that point). In addition, the lamp notification is performed for 300 seconds by blinking the frame decoration lamp 141 on and off for 250 ms on the all extinguishing base (except for the first and second identification indicators (fourth symbol display) 106a and 106b) (on and off for 300 ms). (If an error notification condition is newly established within 2 seconds, it is performed for 300 seconds from that point).

  Then, the sub CPU 451 sends the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control when 30 seconds and 300 seconds have passed since the winning frequency abnormality error start designation command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470. By transmitting the winning frequency abnormal error end designation command to the unit 470, the notification of the winning frequency abnormal error (liquid crystal notification, voice notification, and lamp notification) by the sub-side ends.

  Note that “FE21H” is set in the winning frequency abnormality error start designation command transmitted from the sub CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, and the winning frequency abnormality error end designation command is “FF21H”. Is transmitted to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470 by the command transmission process of S4010 (see FIG. 40), respectively. Further, in this winning frequency abnormality error notification, the external information terminal output as the main notification is not executed.

  Returning to FIG. 67, if NO in step S6704, the sub CPU 451 moves the process to step S6718, and sets the remaining time counter (80 seconds) in the storage area of the payout information RAM as the setting destination, as in step S6702. To do. In this case, the remaining time stored in the buffer area to which the winning information RAM is set is 0 (buffer area (5) in FIG. 68B). Then, the process proceeds to S6720, the sub CPU 451 updates (+1) the value of the normal winning counter, and the process proceeds to S6722.

  Therefore, when it is determined No in S6704 described above, if even one of the buffer areas has a remaining time of 0, that is, within the elapsed time since winning the past nine ordinary winning devices 122, Since at least one has reached the reference time, in this case, it is determined that the winning frequency of the game ball to the normal winning device 122 is normal. In other words, this means that the number of game balls won in the normal winning device 122 within the reference time is less than 9 (8 times at most, see FIG. 68B). Each time the normal determination of the winning frequency is made, the value of the normal winning counter is incremented (+1).

  In S6722, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the value of the normal winning counter is less than 10, and if it is not less than 10 (S6722: No), that is, if the value of the normal winning counter is 10, the process is performed in S6724. If it is less than 10 (S6722: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown process) of FIG. Then, the sub CPU 451 clears the value of the normal winning counter in S6724, shifts the processing to S6726, and updates (-1) the value of the abnormal winning counter. That is, every time the value of the normal winning counter reaches 10, the value of the abnormal winning counter is decremented (−1). FIG. 68 (B) schematically shows the flow of processing from S6718 to S6726 when it is determined No in S6704, that is, the flow of processing when no error occurs in the winning frequency abnormality error processing. .

  That is, in the winning frequency abnormality error process, an abnormal winning counter that is incremented (+1) when it is determined to be abnormal in the process of S 6704 (S 6704: Yes), and normal (S 6704: No) is determined in the process of S 6704. A normal winning counter which is incremented (+1) when the normal winning counter is 10, and the abnormal winning counter is decremented (-1) every time the normal winning counter reaches 10. When the abnormal winning counter reaches 5, an error notification of abnormal winning frequency is executed. When the process of S6726 is completed, the sub CPU 451 returns the process to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 40 (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown process).

  In the above description, the winning information RAM used for the winning frequency abnormality error process has nine buffer areas, but this is not limited. In the above-described processing of S6710, S6720, and S6726, the abnormal winning counter or the normal winning counter is updated by adding (+1) or subtracting (-1) by a predetermined value. Is not limited. Further, the process of S6726 may be skipped (omitted) when the value of the abnormal winning counter is 0. Further, every time the normal winning counter reaches 10, the abnormal winning counter is decremented (-1), but this is not limited. Further, when the abnormal winning counter reaches 5, the abnormal winning frequency is abnormal. The error notification is executed, but this is not limited.

  In addition, the winning frequency abnormality error processing is performed for winning in the normal winning device 122, but is not limited thereto, and other first starting devices 116, second starting devices 118, first big winning devices 120, It is only necessary to enter a ball into another device (a ball entry means) that is advantageous to the player when entering the ball, such as winning the two major winning devices 146 or entering the normal symbol operating gate 112. In this case, the winning frequency abnormality error process may be performed for each of the winning devices individually, or a plurality of winning devices (for example, the normal winning device 122 and the first starting device 116) are collected. Further, error determination for the collected winning devices (one error determination for a plurality of winning devices) may be performed.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 35, the reference time set as a criterion set by the holes stored in the abnormality-related information storage area of the sub-RAM 453 is a predetermined backup when the power is shut down as abnormality-related information. However, this is not limited to the reference time, and for example, the process of storing the winning information RAM used in the winning frequency abnormality error processing described above is stored. The time data, the number of abnormality determinations and the number of normal determinations counted by the abnormal winning counter and the normal winning counter may be stored. With this configuration, the security function is further enhanced.

  As is apparent from the above description, the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment determines an abnormality in the winning frequency for a predetermined winning device (ordinary winning device 122 in the present embodiment), and based on the determination result, the winning frequency abnormality A winning frequency abnormality error process for notifying an error can be executed. Generally, such an abnormality in the winning frequency is caused by fraud in which a game ball is guided using a magnet, and a desired winning device is awarded a large number of game balls in a short time to defraud the winning ball. Therefore, conventionally, a magnetic sensor or the like that detects the use of a magnet at a predetermined position such as a game board surface is attached, and such an illegal act was performed, that is, an abnormal winning frequency occurred. I was trying to detect that.

  However, such a technique requires a large number of magnetic sensors, and increases the cost burden due to the wiring of the magnetic sensors, etc., and also activates an accessory (solenoid, motor, etc.) provided on the game board surface. There is a possibility that the magnetic sensor may malfunction due to the above, and there is a problem that it is impossible to detect the occurrence of an abnormal winning frequency that occurs when a game ball is clogged on the game board surface (so-called “grape”). In that respect, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, by performing the above-described winning frequency abnormality error processing without relying on a magnetic sensor, an irregularity in the winning frequency with respect to a predetermined winning device caused by fraud due to a magnet or grapes is detected. It becomes possible to detect with high accuracy, and as a result, the cost can be reduced and the security of the gaming machine 100 can be further increased.

  Further, in this prize frequency abnormality error process, as described above, the elapsed time after winning the prize winning device is counted up to a reference time as a criterion that allows the hall to be set at a predetermined time in advance, Since abnormality determination is performed based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached the reference time, as a result, appropriate abnormality determination processing can be executed to appropriately handle error notification and the like become. In addition, for a predetermined number of winnings in the winning device, the elapsed time is stored for each winning, and is stored when a predetermined number of game balls are won (in this embodiment, the tenth is winning). Since it is determined whether or not the reference time has been reached for each elapsed time, as a result, the accuracy of the abnormality determination in the winning frequency abnormality error process is improved. In addition, when it is determined to be abnormal, it is not immediately notified that an error in the prize winning frequency has occurred, but the number of times determined to be normal is taken into account and the number of times determined to be normal and the number of normal determinations (abnormal winning counter or normal Winning counter)), that is, when the value obtained by subtracting the normal number data based on the number of times determined to be normal from the abnormal number data based on the number of times determined to be abnormal becomes a predetermined value, As a result, the accuracy of the abnormality determination in the winning frequency abnormality error process is further improved, and it becomes possible to reduce error notification of erroneous winning frequency abnormality as much as possible.

  Further, as described above, the determination and notification of the winning frequency abnormality error is performed only by the sub side, that is, by the winning frequency abnormality error process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. That is, the error processing described above other than the winning frequency abnormality error processing is performed by the main side (the main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400) executing the predetermined abnormality processing (error determination) shown in FIG. If an error is determined, an error start designation command (abnormal winning error start designation command, dish full error start designation command, door opening error start designation command, payout state error start designation command, switch abnormal error start designation command, Magnet detection error start specification command, discharge error start specification command, radio wave detection error start specification command, discharge ball check error start specification command, solenoid photosensor abnormal error start specification command, impact detection error start specification command, and abnormal V winning error start specification Command) Ri, notification of the error is configured to be performed by the sub-side (see FIGS. 18 to 32).

  In that respect, the winning frequency abnormality error is generated when the sub-side (production control unit 450) uses a detection signal from a normal winning device switch 422 as a detecting means for detecting that a game ball has won the normal winning device 122 as a main control unit. When an error is determined by the winning frequency abnormality error process by receiving an input via the normal number 400 (S5120 in FIG. 51), an error is detected in the winning frequency abnormality error process. By sending a winning frequency abnormality error start designation command from the CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, that is, by sending a winning frequency abnormality error start designation command to the device on the sub side, The external information terminal output as a notification on the main side is disabled and a prize frequency error error on the sub side That is, a liquid crystal notification, a sound notification, and a lamp notification related to a winning frequency abnormality error via a predetermined device (main display device 108, sound output device 138, frame decoration lamp 141) controlled by the sub side. (See FIGS. 67 to 69).

  Generally, in order to detect a predetermined error early, abnormal processing as various security measures is performed on gaming machines, and such abnormal processing is executed on the main side. . However, since the storage means on the main side is limited in capacity and most of it is used for main control of the game, as a result, there is a limit to performing such abnormal processing on the main side. In that respect, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the winning frequency abnormality error processing as the abnormal processing is executed on the sub side, and the sub information is controlled by disabling the external information terminal output as the main side notification. Since the abnormality is notified only by a predetermined device, as a result, the degree of freedom of use of the storage device on the main side is increased, and the storage device on the sub side with no capacity limitation is effectively used to take security measures. Can be increased. Further, in the winning frequency abnormality error process, the elapsed time since the ring buffer has won the normal winning device 122 is only counted up to the reference time, so the capacity of the storage area of the winning information RAM as the storage means on the sub side Can be reduced as much as possible.

  Note that, in the error processing described above other than the winning frequency abnormality error processing, the error determination is performed by the main side (main CPU 401 of the main control unit 400) as shown in FIG. The determination of such an error may be executed by the sub side (sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450) in accordance with the winning frequency abnormality error process. . That is, when the sub-side (sub-CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450) executes a predetermined abnormality process (determination of error) shown in FIG. 17 and determines that there is an error in this abnormality process, the sub-CPU 451 to the image sound control unit 460. And an error start designation command (abnormal winning error start designation command, dish full error start designation command, door open error start designation command, payout state error start designation command, switch abnormal error, etc. Start designation command, magnet detection error start designation command, discharge error start designation command, radio wave detection error start designation command, discharge ball check error start designation command, solenoid photosensor abnormal error start designation command, impact detection error start designation command and abnormality V Winning error start specification command By sending, it is sufficient to perform an error notification according to the error determination. Then, as one means for realizing such sub-side error determination, sensor switch devices (first starter switch 410, etc.) connected to the input side of the main control unit 400 shown in FIG. Second starter switch 411, normal symbol operation gate switch 413, first big prize device switch 414, second big prize device switch 416, second big prize device discharge switch 418, probability change confirmation area (V area) switch 419, probability change The fixed region (V region) photosensor 420, the normal winning device switch 422, the dish full tank switch 423, the magnetic sensor 426, the radio wave sensor 427, the impact sensor 428, and the frame count switch 429) are connected to the input side of the effect control unit 450. You may make it do.

<Variation of winning frequency abnormality error processing>
Next, a modified example of the winning frequency abnormality error process performed in S5122 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of an abnormality-related command reception process according to a variation of the winning frequency abnormality error process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. FIG. 71 is executed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the modified example of a winning frequency abnormality error process. 70 shows only the processing (S7000 to S7006) replacing S5120 and S5122 of FIG. 51 described above, and the other processing (S5000 to S5118) is the abnormality-related command shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. Since it is the same as the reception process, the description is omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 70, in S7000, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a normal winning device winning command is received from the main control unit 400 (see S713 in FIG. 7). When it is determined that the normal winning device winning command is received (S7000: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S7002, and when it is determined that the normal winning device winning command is not received (S7002: No). ), The process proceeds to S7004. Note that S7000 in FIG. 70 is the same processing as S5120 in FIG.

  In S7002, the sub CPU 451 updates (+1) the value of the normal winning device winning counter, and moves the process to S7004. Note that the normal winning device winning counter is a counter provided in the sub RAM 453 that indicates the number of game balls won to the normal winning device 122, which is incremented (+1) every time the sub-side receives a normal winning device winning command from the main side. It is.

  In S7004, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a variable effect start command (see S918 in FIG. 9) has been received from the main control unit 400. As described above, the variation effect start command is a case where a game ball wins the first starting device 116 or the second starting device 118 and a special symbol variation display (symbol matching game as a big win lottery) for the winning is performed. The sub-side receives commands from the main side. In other words, the symbol matching game (big hit lottery) in which the effect symbols are variably displayed on the main display device 108 is performed on the sub side as many times as the variation effect start command is received.

  If it is determined in S7004 that a variation effect start command has been received (S7004: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S7006 and executes a winning frequency abnormality error process (modified example), and the process is performed by the timer of FIG. The process returns to the interrupt process (S4008: input device process). On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation effect start command has not been received (S7004: No), the sub CPU 451 returns the process to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 40 (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown process).

  Referring to FIG. 71, when the winning frequency abnormality error process (modified example) is started based on the reception of the variation effect start command, first, in step S7100, the sub CPU 451 updates (+1) the value of the start number counter. The process proceeds to S7102. The start number counter is a counter provided in the sub RAM 453 that indicates the start number (execution number) of the symbol matching game (big hit lottery), which is incremented (+1) every time the sub side receives a variable effect start command from the main side. It is.

  In step S7102, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the value of the start number counter is less than 10. If the value is not less than 10 (S7104: No), that is, if the value of the start number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step S7104. If it is less than 10 (S7102: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 40 (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown process). Then, the sub CPU 451 clears the value of the start number counter in S7104, and moves the process to S7106.

  In S7106, the sub CPU 451 determines whether the value of the normal winning device winning counter (see S7002 in FIG. 70) is less than 2 or not (S7106: No), that is, the value of the ordinary winning device winning counter is equal to. If it becomes 2, the process proceeds to S7108. If it is less than 2 (S7106: Yes), the process proceeds to S7118. That is, the process of S7106 is a process of determining whether or not the value of the normal winning device winning counter has reached the set reference number.

  In S7108, the sub CPU 451 clears the value of the normal winning device winning counter, moves the process to S7109, and clears the value of the normal winning counter. Then, the process proceeds to S7110, and the sub CPU 451 updates (+1) the value of the abnormal winning counter, and the process proceeds to S7112. Note that the normal winning counter and the abnormal winning counter are the same as described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted (see FIG. 67).

  In S7112, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the value of the abnormal winning counter is less than 5, and if it is not less than 5 (S7112: No), that is, if the value of the abnormal winning counter becomes 5, the process is performed in S7114. If it is less than 5 (7112: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown process) in FIG. Then, the sub CPU 451 clears the value of the abnormal winning counter in S7114, moves the process to S7116, and sets a winning frequency abnormal error start designation command for notifying that a winning frequency abnormal error has occurred.

  When the winning frequency abnormal error start designation command is set, the sub CPU 451 transmits the winning frequency abnormal error start designation command to the image sound control unit 460 and the lamp control unit 470, so that the sub-side in FIG. Notification of the indicated winning frequency abnormality error, that is, liquid crystal notification, sound notification, and lamp notification related to the winning frequency abnormality error is performed. When the process of S7116 is completed, the sub CPU 451 returns the process to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 40 (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown process).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in S7106, the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S7118, clears the value of the normal winning device winning counter, moves the process to S7120, and updates (+1) the value of the normal winning counter. Then, the process proceeds to S7122, and the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the value of the normal winning counter is less than 10 (S7122: No), that is, when the value of the normal winning counter becomes 10. Moves the process to S7124, and if it is less than 10 (S7122: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown process) of FIG.

  In S7124, the sub CPU 451 clears the value of the normal winning counter, moves the process to S7126, and updates (-1) the value of the abnormal winning counter. That is, every time the value of the normal winning counter reaches 10, the value of the abnormal winning counter is decremented (−1). When the process of S7126 is completed, the sub CPU 451 returns the process to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 40 (S4007: winning information RAM remaining time countdown process).

  As is apparent from the above description, in this modified example of the winning frequency abnormality error process, every time the symbol matching game (big win lottery) starts 10 times, the number of winning game balls to the normal winning device 122 is 2 It is determined whether or not there are more than two times, and if there are more than two times (S7106: No), it is determined that the winning frequency of the game ball to the normal winning device 122 is abnormal and less than two times. (S7106: Yes), it is determined that the winning frequency of the game ball to the normal winning device 122 is normal. The abnormal winning counter is incremented (+1) every time it is determined to be abnormal (S7110), and the normal winning counter is incremented (+1) every time it is determined to be normal (S7120), and the normal winning counter is set to 10. Every time, the abnormal prize counter is decremented (-1) (S7126). When the abnormal winning counter reaches 5, an error notification of an abnormal winning frequency is executed (S7116).

  In other words, in this variation of the winning frequency abnormality error process, the gaming machine 100 has a predetermined winning device (this implementation) within a period in which the symbol matching game (big hit lottery) is executed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 10 times). In the embodiment, the abnormality in the winning frequency is determined based on whether the number of winnings in the normal winning device 122) has reached a predetermined reference number (two in this embodiment). This is because a gaming machine is generally configured such that the number of winnings in the normal winning device 122 is relatively lower than the number of times of the start of the symbol matching game. The number of times of symbol matching game and the number of times of reference two times are not limited to this, as long as the ratio relationship between the two satisfies a certain range (for example, the number of times of symbol matching game (for the period If the number of times) is ZC and the reference number of times is KC, 0.1 ≦ KC / ZC ≦ 0.5, defined by a real test or the like). Even if the modified example of the winning frequency abnormality error process is configured as described above, it is possible to achieve substantially the same effect as the effect of the winning frequency abnormality error process described above.

  In the modified example of the winning frequency abnormality error process, how many times the game ball is won in the normal winning device 122 is within a period in which the symbol matching game (hit lottery) relating to the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times. However, this period may be a period in which the symbol matching game (winning lottery) based on the passing of the game ball to the symbol operating gate 112 is executed a predetermined number of times. Alternatively, a period in which the winning of the game ball to the first starter 116 or / and the second starter 118 (detection of the game ball of the first starter switch 410 or / and the second starter switch 411) is detected a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, it may be a period in which the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol operation gate 112 (detection of the game ball of the normal symbol operation gate switch 413) is detected a predetermined number of times. And when it is set as such a period, if the frequency | count (ZC) and reference frequency | count (KC) which concern on a period are set suitably so that above-mentioned ratio relationship (0.1 <= KC / ZC <= 0.5) may be satisfy | filled. Good.

  Thus, the reference number of times set in the modified example of the winning frequency abnormality error process is the same as the reference time set on the above-described RAM clear preparation screen (FIG. 35). What is necessary is just to comprise so that it can set. Other configurations can be changed as appropriate according to the above-described winning frequency abnormality error process.

  Above, abnormal winning error, dish full error, door open error, payout status error, switch error error, magnet detection error, discharge error, radio wave detection error, discharge ball check error, solenoid photosensor error error, impact detection error, error V The winning error and the winning frequency abnormality error have been described. However, when these errors occur or when a specific error among these errors occurs, the game of the gaming machine 100 may be stopped. Good. As a specific stop of the game, for example, the launch control unit 430 controls the launch device 434 to disable the launch of the game ball.

<About error notification>
(A) Liquid crystal notification at the time of error notification In the above-described various errors, the liquid crystal notification for notifying abnormality via the screen of the main display device 108 is a dish full error, door open error, payout state error, Switch error error, magnet detection error, discharge error, radio wave detection error, discharge ball check error, solenoid photo sensor error, impact detection error, winning frequency error. That is, these liquid crystal notifications are displayed as follows on the screen of the main display device 108 as described above.

・ Dish full error… “Dish full error Please remove the ball” (see Fig. 55)
・ Door open error: “Door open error” (see FIGS. 56 and 57)
・ Payment status error: "Please call a staff member" (see Fig. 58)
-Switch error error: "Switch error error" (see Fig. 59)
・ Magnet detection error: "Magnet detection" (see Fig. 60)
・ Discharge error: “Discharge error” (see Fig. 61)
-Radio wave detection error: "Radio wave detection" (see Fig. 62)
-Ejected ball check error: "Economy device discharge error" (see Fig. 63)
-Solenoid photosensor error error: "Large winning device error" (see Fig. 64)
・ Shock detection error: "Shock detection" (see Fig. 65)
-Winning frequency abnormal error: "Winning frequency abnormal error" (see Fig. 69)
A specific aspect displayed on the screen of the main display device 108 for liquid crystal notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of liquid crystal notification at the time of error notification.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the liquid crystal notification at the time of error notification is displayed on the left side or the lower right side of the screen of the main display device 108, and is displayed so as not to affect other displays. In the figure, 7200 is an effect symbol that is variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol, 7201 is an effect symbol hold display (indicating the number of times the special symbol lottery is held), and 7202 is variably displayed in synchronization with the normal symbol. The directing design is shown. That is, the liquid crystal notification is displayed so as not to hide these symbols and the display related to the hold (they may be visually recognized even if they partially overlap). Other displays include, for example, a round display related to a big hit game, a display for instructing a right or left strike, a display for operating an effect button (chance button) 142 or an effect key 144, and the like.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the liquid crystal notification at the time of error notification is displayed such that the height of the display position is adjusted when errors are overlapped so as not to overlap each other. In FIG. 72, the display position of each error notification on the screen of the main display device 108 is shown as an example. In this way, the liquid crystal notification can display the error at the same time even when errors are duplicated. Further, the error display may be performed such that the base data is displayed with a predetermined transparency (for example, 50%) so that the screen display of the overlapped portion can be seen through.

  Here, the display position of each error notification is desirably displayed at the bottom of the screen of the main display device 108 as described above. The reason for this is that a store clerk, factory inspector, etc. who stands and looks at the screen of the main display device 108 looks down on the screen of the main display device 108. Therefore, if the display position is at the top of the screen, an error display is visible. Because it becomes difficult.

(A) Lamp notification at the time of error notification In the various errors described above, the lamp notification for notifying the abnormality via the frame decoration lamp 141 is an abnormal winning error, a door opening error, a payout state error, or a switch abnormality as described above. An error, a magnet detection error, a discharge error, a radio wave detection error, a discharge ball check error, a solenoid photosensor abnormality error, an impact detection error, an abnormal V winning error, and a winning frequency abnormal error. Here, as described above, these lamp notifications are executed for all errors except for the abnormal V winning error by blinking the frame decoration lamp 141 in red on and off for 250 ms on the all extinguished base (FIGS. 53 and 53). 54, FIGS. 56 to 65, and FIG. 69) For the abnormal V winning error, the frame decoration lamp 141 is completely turned off (see FIG. 66) in preference to the lamp notification related to other errors.

  In other words, for all errors except the abnormal V prize error, the frame decoration lamp 141 is flashed in red for 250 ms on / off on the all extinguished base, that is, all lamps are notified in the same manner. When these error notification conditions are newly established while performing error lamp notification, the frame decoration lamp 141 blinks red on and off for 250 ms on the all extinguishing base, The lamp notification based on the newly generated error may be performed for a predetermined period. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to give priority to the lamp notification of these errors (the same notification mode is obtained even if priority is given).

  On the other hand, the abnormal V prize error is a notification mode in which the frame decoration lamp 141 is completely turned off, that is, a notification mode that is different from the lamp notification related to other errors. When the abnormal V winning error notification condition is newly established, the execution of the lamp notification related to another error is immediately stopped and the frame decoration lamp 141 is completely turned off. That is, the lamp notification of the abnormal V winning error is a lamp notification having a higher priority than the lamp notification related to other errors.

  FIG. 73 shows a state in which the frame decoration lamp 141 is lit on the all-off base. FIG. 73 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which the frame decoration lamp 141 is lit at the time of error lamp notification. As shown in FIG. 73, the frame decoration lamp 141 blinks on the all extinguished base, so that it can be easily noticed by the store clerk and the abnormality of the gaming machine 100 can be detected at an early stage. Further, when the frame decoration lamp 141 is completely turned off, it becomes more noticeable, so that it becomes possible to detect an abnormal V prize error earlier and also to deter a person who performs fraud.

Here, the first and second identification indicators 106a and 106b (fourth symbol indicator 106) in the lamp notification will be described. As described above, the fourth symbol display 106 is a display provided on the game board 102 for notifying that a predetermined symbol (special symbol, normal symbol, production symbol) is changing or stopped. Thus, the display is controlled to be turned on in a predetermined manner on the sub side (lamp control unit 470). As shown in FIG. 4A, the lamp control unit 470 is not only the fourth symbol display unit 106 but also a board lamp 110 provided on the game board 102 as a notification means for performing a predetermined effect by illumination, a glass Lighting of LEDs such as an upper frame lamp 140, a frame decoration lamp 141 (including a surrounding lamp 143), a chance button lamp 475, a patrol lamp 139 and the like provided in the frame 150 is controlled.

  Thus, in each lamp notification related to the error, all errors except for the abnormal V prize error are notified by flashing the frame decoration lamp 141 on and off for 250 ms on and off, and the abnormal V prize is received. As for the error, the lamp notification is performed by turning off all the lights, but as described above, the fourth symbol display 106 is excluded from the control of the lamp notification. That is, in the lamp notification related to the error (including the lamp notification of the abnormal V prize error), among the notification means controlled by the lamp control unit 470, the panel lamp 110, the frame lamp 140, the frame decoration lamp 141 (the surrounding lamp 143). ) Although the chance button lamp 475 and the patrol lamp 139 operate according to the predetermined lamp notification control related to the error, only the fourth symbol display 106 does not operate according to the lamp notification control related to the error. As usual, in response to a change display of a predetermined symbol (special symbol, normal symbol, production symbol), an operation for notifying the player in a predetermined manner indicating that the symbol is changing or stopped. It is supposed to run. The reason for this is as follows.

  That is, the fourth symbol display 106 informs the player of the process of special symbol lottery (big win lottery) and normal symbol lottery (win lottery), and the results (including changes in symbols and stops). It is an extremely important notification means, and if these notification means are controlled in a different manner and in a different manner by error notification based on the occurrence of an error, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the big hit or hit, This is because there is a risk of giving a disadvantage to the player.

  In addition, in the lamp notification related to the error performed by the sub side in this way, the notification means for performing a predetermined notification among the notification means controlled by the sub side, even if the notification means is other than the fourth symbol display 106. May be excluded from the control of the lamp notification related to the error, that is, not to follow the control of the lamp notification related to the error.

(C) Voice notification at the time of error notification In the above-mentioned various errors, the voice notification for notifying abnormality via the speaker (sound output device) 138 is an abnormal winning error, dish full tank error, door opening error as described above. , Switch abnormality error, magnet detection error, discharge error, radio wave detection error, discharge ball check error, impact detection error, winning frequency abnormality error. In other words, as described above, these voice notifications perform a predetermined operation (voice notification) for a predetermined period based on a predetermined designation command. When another error notification condition is satisfied, voice notification is performed in accordance with the priority order shown in FIG. FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the priority order of voice notification at the time of error notification. The priority order of the voice notification will be described including the voice notification when the power is turned on and when the power is restored (see FIG. 34).

Referring to FIG. 74, the priority order of voice notification at the time of error notification is as follows.
• Priority 1 ... When power is turned on (start by power-on command, immediately switch, continue for 30 seconds, restart if re-received, see FIG. 34)
-Priority 2 ... When power is restored (start by power restore command, switch immediately, continue for 30 seconds, restart if re-received, see FIG. 34)
Priority 3 ... Abnormal prize error (started by an abnormal prize error start designation command, activated when error notification with high priority is not in progress, continued for 30 seconds, restarts when re-received, see FIG. 54)
Priority 4 ... Magnet detection error (Started by a magnet detection error start designation command, activated when an error notification with high priority is not being issued, continued for 30 seconds, restarts when re-received, see FIG. 60)
-Priority 5 ... Shock detection error (started by shock detection error start designation command, activated when error notification is not in high priority, continued for 30 seconds, restarts when re-received, see FIG. 65)
Priority 6: Radio wave detection error (Started by radio wave detection error start designation command, activated when error notification is not in high priority, continued for 30 seconds, restarts when re-received, see FIG. 62)
Priority 7: Ejected ball confirmation error (Started by a command to start ejected ball confirmation error, activated when error notification with high priority is not in progress, continued for 30 seconds, restarted when re-received, see FIG. 63)
・ Priority 8: Discharge error (Started by a discharge error start designation command, activated when error notification is not in high priority, continued for 30 seconds, restarted when re-received, see FIG. 61)
・ Priority 9: Winning frequency abnormal error (Started with a winning frequency abnormal error start designation command, activated when error notification with high priority is not in progress, continued for 30 seconds, restarts when re-received, see FIG. 69)
Priority 10: Door opening error (started by door opening error start designation command, activated when not in error notification of high priority, 5 minutes from receipt of door opening error start designation command or 5 from reception of door opening error end designation command (Continue until after second, see FIGS. 56 and 57)
• Priority 11: Switch error error (Started with a switch error error start designation command, activated when a high priority error is not being reported, continues until a switch error error end designation command is received, see FIG. 59)
・ Priority 12: Dish full tank error (Started with a full dish error start designation command, triggered when a high priority error is not being reported, continued until a full dish error end designation command is received, see FIG. 59)
Here, the voice notification at the time of error notification executes error notification according to the above priority order, but when the error notification with high priority is finished, the execution time of error notification with low priority is completed. If it has not yet passed, this low priority error notification is started. For example, if the priority 4 magnet detection error occurs after the priority 12 tray full error notification is started, the voice notification is immediately switched to the magnet detection error notification. Then, when 30 seconds have passed since the sound notification of the magnet detection error has passed, if the pan full error has not yet been resolved, that is, if the pan full switch 423 is on, the pan full error will immediately occur. The notification is started. Alternatively, if a priority 12 full dish error occurs after the priority 4 magnet detection error has started, the full dish error will still be resolved when 30 seconds have passed since the sound detection of the magnet detection error. Only when it is not, starts a full dish error notification. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform voice notification of a predetermined error according to the priority order, and as a result, it is possible to contribute to improving the security of the gaming machine 100.

(D) Error notification in which external information terminal output is not performed By the way, in the various errors described above, the devices controlled by the sub side, that is, the main display device 108, the speaker (sound output device) 138, and the frame decoration lamp 141 are used. Then, any or all of liquid crystal notification, voice notification, and lamp notification are executed to notify the error by the gaming machine 100 itself. However, as described above, these various errors include the error notification on the main side. Some of the external information terminal output is executed together, and some are not executed. Hereinafter, this point will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the error notification time and the presence / absence of external information terminal output for each error type.

  Referring to FIG. 75, in the various errors described above, errors that can be output to the outside via the external information terminal output are abnormal winning errors, magnet detection errors, and discharge errors. Errors that cannot be output are: full tray error, door open error, payout status error, switch error error, radio wave detection error, discharge ball check error, solenoid photo sensor error error, impact detection error, abnormal V prize error, prize frequency Abnormal error.

  Here, the error notification time that can be output from the external information terminal and the error notification time that cannot be output from the external information terminal are compared. However, the dish full tank error, door open error, payout state error, switch error error (all errors that cannot be output to the external information terminal) are based on the end of the notification time until the error is resolved. Exclude these errors. In other words, here, an error notification (based on an actual error end (based on an error end designation command from the main side)) that ends error notification for a predetermined time regardless of whether the error is resolved or not is started. Error notification time) is compared.

  First, when comparing the notification time of the liquid crystal notification, the abnormal winning error as an error that can be output from the external information terminal is “-” (no control, the same applies hereinafter), the magnet detection error is 300 seconds, and the discharge error is 30 seconds. The external information terminal cannot output the radio wave detection error, the discharge ball check error, the solenoid photo sensor abnormality error, the impact detection error, the winning frequency abnormality error is 300 seconds, and the abnormal V winning error is “−”. Yes.

  Next, when comparing the notification times of voice notification, abnormal winning error, magnet detection error, and discharge error as errors that can be output to the external information terminal are 30 seconds, and radio waves as errors that cannot be output from the external information terminal The detection error, the discharge ball check error, the impact detection error, and the winning frequency abnormality error are 30 seconds, the solenoid photosensor abnormality error, and the abnormal V winning error are “−”.

  Next, when comparing the notification time of the lamp notification, the abnormal winning error as an error capable of outputting the external information terminal is 1 second or 30 seconds, the magnet detection error is 300 seconds, and the discharge error is 30 seconds. The radio wave detection error, the discharge ball check error, the solenoid photo sensor abnormality error, the impact detection error, and the winning frequency abnormality error are 300 seconds, and the abnormal V winning error is unlimited.

  As is clear from the above description, the notification time in liquid crystal notification is 30 seconds or 300 seconds for errors that can be output to the external information terminal, and 300 seconds for all errors that cannot be output to the external information terminal, except for no control. ing. The notification time in audio notification is 30 seconds for all errors that can be output to the external information terminal and errors that cannot be output to the external information terminal, except for no control. The notification time in the lamp notification is 1 second, 30 seconds or 300 seconds for errors that can be output to the external information terminal, and 300 seconds or no limit for errors that cannot be output to the external information terminal.

  That is, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, an error notification time of an error that cannot be output to the external information terminal (an error that is not output to the outside via the external information terminal) is an error that can be output to the external information terminal (external information terminal). This is at least the same time or longer than the error notification time of the error output to the outside via the. More specifically, the notification time of the liquid crystal notification and lamp notification of the error that cannot be output to the external information terminal is at least the same time as the notification time of the liquid crystal notification and lamp notification of the error that can be output from the external information terminal. The notification time for voice notification of an error that cannot be output from the external information terminal is the same as the notification time of the error that can be output from the external information terminal. In other words, the error notification time for errors that cannot be output to the external information terminal is executed for a longer time than the error notification time for errors that can be output to the external information terminal.

  Generally, the storage means on the main side is limited in capacity, and most of it is used for main control of the game. As a result, external information terminal output from the main board side is performed in relation to all errors. It is difficult. In that respect, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if an error cannot be output from the external information terminal, the error notification time is executed longer than the error notification time of the error that can be output from the external information terminal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification function of the error notification that cannot be output from the external information terminal from being degraded as compared to the error notification of the error that can be output from the external information terminal. In addition, with this configuration, since the external information terminal output as a notification on the main side is disabled and only the predetermined device controlled by the sub-side is notified of the predetermined error, as a result, the main side The degree of freedom of use of the storage means can be increased. Of course, the game information output terminal board (external information terminal) 424 connected to the output side of the main control unit 400 shown in FIG. You may make it perform the external information terminal output concerning an error or a specific error from the sub side. Even if comprised in this way, the substantially same effect can be show | played.

  Note that the notification time for voice notification is the same for errors that can be output from the external information terminal and errors that cannot be output from the external information terminal.For voice notification, if the notification time is lengthened, it becomes annoying and unnecessary for the player. This may cause discomfort. This is especially true when the volume MAX is used for notification. In addition, if you want to make the audio notification of an error that cannot be output from the external information terminal longer than the error that can be output from the external information terminal, as an example, reduce the volume after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the audio notification. Etc.

<Input device processing>
The input device process performed in S4008 (FIG. 40) will be described based on FIGS. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of the input device process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. First, in S7600, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a signal detected by the input device 145 has been input. If the signal is input (S7600: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S7602. If the signal is not input (S7600: No), the sub CPU 451 performs the process as a timer interrupt process (S4010: command transmission process). Return to.

  In S7602, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a demonstration effect (demo movie) including a top menu screen waiting for a customer, a pachinko log screen, and the like is being performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 77, the top menu screen is a screen displayed on the main display device 108 in which predetermined selection items that can be selected by the player are displayed in a list. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the top menu screen.

  Referring to FIG. 77, on the top menu screen, selection items of “Pachi log”, “actual machine customization”, “pick up selection”, “pachinko course understood in 90 seconds”, and “return” are displayed in order from the top. By moving the cursor to a desired selection item with the up and down buttons of the effect key 144 and pressing the effect button 142, the selection item is appropriately selected and determined.

  When “Pachi log” is selected, a screen related to the Pachi log, such as a login menu screen (password entry screen) and a game menu screen (screen for displaying a player's individual game history), which will be described later, is displayed. The When “actual machine customization” is selected, a screen for customizing the screen (color, font, background, music, etc.) of the main display device 108 is displayed. When “Select Recommended Men” is selected, a screen for selecting recommended men (displayed as a recommendation, a person who wants to support, and a presentation) is displayed. When “Pachinko course to understand in 90 seconds” is selected, a screen explaining the pachinko game is displayed. When “RETURN” is selected, the screen returns to the symbol stop screen before the top menu screen is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 76, in S7602, the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S7610 when the demonstration effect is performed (S7602: Yes), and when the demonstration effect is not performed (S7602: No), the process proceeds to S7604. Move to.

  In S7604, the sub CPU 451 sets a display instruction command according to various effect patterns, and returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4010: command transmission process). That is, in the gaming machine 100, when either the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 is operated during the game, the effect displayed on the main display device 108 can be generated / changed according to various effect patterns. Thereby, in the gaming machine 100, it is possible to suggest the possibility (reliability) of winning the jackpot by the current lottery, or to experience that the presentation changes depending on the action of the player. The effect can be enhanced. The production effect is the degree of effectiveness of the production that suggests the probability of a game result advantageous to the player (for example, a win or big hit), and the reliability is a game result advantageous to the player. It is a barometer of probability.

  In step S7610, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not the login flag is ON. If the in-login flag is ON, it indicates that the game history information can be stored in the game history information storage area of the sub RAM 453. Then, if the login flag is on (S7610: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S7630, and if the login flag is not ON (S7610: No), moves the process to S7612.

  In step S7612, the sub CPU 451 sets a login menu display instruction command based on the fact that the player has selected the patch log screen. This login menu display instruction command is a display instruction command for causing the main display device 108 to display a login menu screen (password input screen) that prompts the player to log in to the gaming machine 100. Thereafter, the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S7614.

  In S7614, the sub CPU 451 determines whether or not a log-in request is made from the player. The player can make a login request to the gaming machine 100 by performing a password input operation using the input device 145 on the login menu screen displayed on the main display device 108 based on S7612. .

<Game system configuration>
Here, the configuration of a gaming system including the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. FIG. 78 is a system configuration diagram of the gaming machine 100 and the information management device 7850 via the Internet 7810. The gaming machine 100 can access an information management device 7850 that manages the gaming history of games played on the gaming machine 100 via the Internet 7810 which is a kind of public line. Here, the “game history” means the number of big hits, the number of chances of change, the number of time reductions, the number of winnings of the first starter 116 and the second starter 118, the number of changes of special symbols, the number of passes of the normal symbol operation gate 112 It shows the history of various games such as the number of changes of normal symbols and other effect images displayed on the main display device 108, but it is not necessarily all history, and a specified part in the game It may be a history.

  In the gaming machine 100, when a start operation (input operation of a password or the like related to a login request to the gaming machine 100) is performed by the player and the game is started, game history information indicating a history of game contents performed by the player I will remember. In the gaming machine 100, when the player performs a termination operation (input operation related to a logout request from the gaming machine 100), the player information, the stored game history information, and the information management device 7850 are accessed. Code information is generated based on the address (so-called homepage address) and the like, and the generated code information is displayed on the main display device 108. Therefore, the sub-ROM 452 described above also stores an address for accessing the information management device 7850.

  Here, “player information” is identification information for identifying an individual player, and is information created based on a terminal ID, a telephone number, and the like built in the information terminal 7800 owned by the player. The information terminal 7800 is not limited to a mobile phone or a smartphone, but may be a fixed terminal such as a personal computer. In this case, the “player information” may be a MAC address or an IP address. Further, the configuration of the “code information” may be a character string such as a bar code or alphanumeric characters in addition to a matrix type two-dimensional code 720 including a QR code (registered trademark). The gaming machine 100 can play a game without performing the start operation or the end operation, but at least a game in which the start operation is performed is referred to as a “game accompanied by a login request” as appropriate. .

  The player accesses the information management device 7850 by imaging and reading the code information displayed on the gaming machine 100 with an information terminal 7800 such as a camera-equipped mobile phone that can access the Internet 7810, for example. When the code information is a character string, the player directly inputs the character string by operating the information terminal 7800, instead of inputting the code information to the information terminal 7800 by imaging with the camera of the information terminal 7800. The information management device 7850 may be accessed. The information terminal 7800 displays a use screen for the player information management function of the information management device 7850, accepts the player's operation, and makes a request for registering game history information to the information management device 7850.

  When accessed from the information terminal 7800, the information management apparatus 7850 registers the game history information included in the code information in association with the player information. The information management device 7850 includes a Web server 7851 for displaying player information and game history information, an application server 7852 for performing player registration processing and authentication processing, and a database server 7853 for registering player game history information. It consists of and.

  In this embodiment, the information management apparatus 7850 is configured by the Web server 7851, the application server 7852, and the database server 7853 as described above. However, the information management apparatus 7850 may be a single server or a server having other functions. You may go out.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the gaming machine 100 has a gaming field management computer in which a gaming information output terminal board (external information terminal) 424 for outputting various signals indicating the predetermined gaming information described above to the outside is installed in the gaming field. 7870. Various signals output from the game information output terminal plate 424 include, for example, hit, jackpot, reach, start (variation of special symbol, normal symbol), winning (including gate passage), probability variation, time reduction, launch ball ( Out balls), prize balls (safe balls), various errors (abnormal winning errors, magnet detection errors, discharge errors), and the like. That is, the game center management computer 7870 has game information on each gaming machine 100. Various signals representing such operation data of the gaming machine 100 are input from the output terminal board 424. The game hall management computer 7870 generates useful information useful for the management of the game hall by collecting, calculating, and analyzing the game information input from each of the gaming machines 100.

  In FIG. 78, each gaming machine 100 (game information output terminal board 424) and the game hall management computer 7870 are directly connected, but this is different from each gaming machine 100 (game information output terminal board 424) and game. A relay device (for example, a call display device provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the gaming machine 100 on the upper part of an island (not shown) where the gaming machine 100 is installed) is provided between the game management computer 7870 and the gaming information output You may make it output the game information which the terminal board 424 outputs to the game hall management computer 7870 via this relay apparatus. In this way, information useful to the player can be displayed on the relay device, which leads to an improvement in service at the game hall.

  Next, the functional configuration of the information management apparatus 7850 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a block diagram of the information management apparatus 7850. The information management device 7850 includes at least an information transmission / reception control unit 7910, an information management control unit 7920, an information storage unit 7930, a password generation unit 7940, a game history management unit 7950, and a usage history management unit 7960. Yes. Each component of the information management apparatus 7850 is configured by appropriately using the functions of the Web server 7851, the application server 7852, and the database server 7853 shown in FIG.

  The information transmission / reception control unit 7910 is a communication interface. In particular, it receives an access request from the information terminal 7800 and outputs information related to the access request to the information management control unit 7920. The information transmission / reception control unit 7910 receives information output from each component of the information management apparatus 7850 as a response to the access request from the information terminal 7800, and transfers the information to the information terminal 7800.

  The information management control unit 7920 is an arithmetic processing device that controls basic operations of the information management device 7850. The information management control unit 7920 determines the request content of the information related to the access request output from the information transmission / reception control unit 7910, and controls response processing according to the request content of the information terminal 7800.

  The information storage unit 7930 is a storage device for various information managed by the information management device 7850. As various information, player information, game history information, usage history information, and other related information are stored. The information storage unit 7930 stores various information in a database for each player.

  When the player requests the issuance of a password from the information terminal 7800 to start a game with a login request, the password generation unit 7940 responds to the request based on the information output from the information management control unit 7920. Process to generate. The password generation unit 7940 outputs the generated password to the information transmission / reception control unit 7910 and transfers it to the information terminal 7800.

  The game history management unit 7950 manages information related to the game history and controls processing. When the player finishes the game with the login request and requests registration of the game history information from the information terminal 7800 to register the game history information, the game history management unit 7950 responds to the request and receives an information management control unit. Based on the information output from 7920, processing for registering game history information is performed.

  The usage history management unit 7960 performs management of information related to the usage history and control of processing. In response to an access request from the information terminal 7800, the usage history management unit 7960 performs a process of recording the player's usage history information based on the information output from the information management control unit 7920.

  Next, the main processing flow of the gaming system will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the main processing flow of the gaming system. When the player accesses the dedicated site of the information management device 7850 by operating the information terminal 7800, the information management device 7850 displays the usage screen information displayed on the information terminal 7800 at the start of authentication of the player information on the information terminal 7800. Forward to. This usage screen is a screen for a player to use the management function of player information, game history information, and usage history information that the information management device 7850 has, including a screen displayed at the start of player information authentication. It is. Information on the use screen can be input by a player's operation as necessary.

  In S8010, a player who plays a game with a log-in request inputs player information registered in advance using the usage screen transferred to the information terminal 7800. The information terminal 7800 makes an access request to the player information management function of the information management device 7850 to the information management device 7850.

  The access request to the information management device 7850 of the information terminal 7800 is not only made by transferring player information input by the player's operation, but also by transferring a terminal ID or the like built in the information terminal 7800. You may go. Further, if the player information related to the information terminal 7800 that has requested access is not registered in advance, the information management device 7850 makes a response such as transmitting image information that prompts registration of the player information to the information terminal 7800.

  In step S <b> 8012, the information management apparatus 7850 performs authentication processing using the player information included in the access request from the information terminal 7800. In step S8014, the information management apparatus 7850 performs password issuance processing. This password issuing process is a process in which the information management apparatus 7850 issues a password necessary for the player to log in to the gaming machine 100 and transfers it to the information terminal 7800.

  In S8020, the player selects and inputs the password issuing process on the selection screen transferred to the information terminal 7800. The information terminal 7800 sends an execution request for password issuance processing to the information management apparatus 7850. In step S8024, the information management apparatus 7850 creates a password using the created player information, and transfers the password to the information terminal 7800.

  In S8030, the player operates the input device 145 to input the password transferred to the information terminal 7800 to the gaming machine 100, and makes a login request to the gaming machine 100. Note that in the case where the password is a barcode or a matrix type two-dimensional code 7820, the player does not input the password by operating the input device 145, but an imaging device is provided in the gaming machine 100 and imaging by the imaging device is performed. You may enter your password.

  In S8032, the gaming machine 100 accepts a login request and performs login processing using the player information included in the password. Then, the process proceeds to S8036, and the gaming machine 100 stores the game history of games that have been performed after logging in, and then proceeds to S8038 to operate the input device 145 at the end of the game to log out to the gaming machine 100. To make a logout request to the gaming machine 100. The gaming machine 100 creates code information (matrix two-dimensional code 7820) including at least player information and game history information, and displays the code information on the main display device. With this displayed code information, it is possible to output information related to the player's individual game history in the gaming machine 100 to the outside.

  In S8050, the player captures and reads the code information displayed on the main display device 108 with the camera of the information terminal 7800, and inputs to the information terminal 7800 that the read code information is transferred. The information terminal 7800 transfers the code information to the information management device 7850 and makes an access request to the information management device 7850.

  In S8052, the information management apparatus 7850 performs an authentication process using the player information included in the code information. In step S8054, the information management apparatus 7850 performs history registration processing for registering the game history information included in the code information and the use history information indicating that the current game has been played. Then, the processing proceeds to S8056, and the information management apparatus 7850 transfers the registered game history information and usage history information to the information terminal 7800.

  In S8070, the information terminal 7800 displays the transferred game history information. The player can view the game history information displayed on the information terminal 7800 and confirm how the game with the current login request is reflected in the game history information. The above is the main processing flow of the gaming system.

  Note that in the gaming system of the present embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and the gaming machine 100 is a swivel type gaming machine (so-called slot machine), a sparrow ball gaming machine, an arrangement ball gaming machine, or the like. It can also be used.

  In particular, in game machines of different types such as pachinko machines and revolving game machines, sharing the game system of the present embodiment, it is possible to enjoy new games beyond the game machine type. Can be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the password input by the input device 145 on the login menu screen is information composed of character strings such as characters and symbols. As described above, the information is received from the player information terminal 7800. When a password issuance request is made by accessing the management device 7850, the password is issued by the information management device 7850, and transferred and displayed on the player's information terminal 7800 (see FIG. 80). That is, the password is information (login request information) that is used to log in to the gaming machine 100 and is used by the gaming machine 100 to identify the logged-in player. Therefore, the password includes the player information of the player who logs into the gaming machine 100.

  The login menu screen is a screen in which character strings corresponding to the password configuration are listed on the main display device 131 and a cursor for selecting the displayed character strings is displayed on the main display device 108. It is. The player uses the input device 145 to appropriately select and determine characters, symbols, and the like corresponding to the password displayed on the information terminal 7800 by appropriately moving the cursor. In this way, the player can make a login request to the gaming machine 100 by performing a password input operation.

  In S7614, if the signal detected by the input device 145 corresponds to the password, the sub CPU 451 determines that a login request has been made by the player (S7614: Yes), and moves the process to S7620. On the other hand, if the signal detected by the input device 145 does not correspond to the password (S7614: No), the sub CPU 451 returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4010: command transmission process). In step S7620, the sub CPU 451 performs login processing based on the input password, and returns the processing to timer interrupt processing (S4010: command transmission processing).

<Login process>
The contents of the login process will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of the login process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. In the login process, first, in S8100, the sub CPU 451 analyzes the password detected by the input device 145, and in S8102, performs the authentication process from the analyzed password by a predetermined authentication method. Then, when the authentication is successful (S8102: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S8110, and when the authentication is not successful (S8102: No), the process moves to S8130.

In S8110, the sub CPU 451 clears the data stored in various storage areas (player information storage area, game history information storage area, code information storage area, etc.) provided in the sub RAM 451, and proceeds to S8112. The player information included in the password is stored in a player information storage area provided in the sub RAM 451. Thereby, in the gaming machine 100, the player information included in the password is designated, and the player of the player information logs in by referring to the player information stored in the player information storage area. It can be recognized that.

  In subsequent S8114, the sub CPU 451 sets the login start flag to ON, and moves the process to S8116. By setting the login start flag to ON, it is possible to indicate that the player is in a state before logging in to the gaming machine 100 using the input device 145 and playing a game.

  In S8116, the sub CPU 451 sets a game history information storage start display instruction command, and the process proceeds to S8118. This game history information storage start display instruction command is a display instruction command for displaying on the main display device 108 that a game played by the player in the gaming machine 100 will be stored as game history information.

  In subsequent S8118, the sub CPU 451 sets the login flag ON, and returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4010: command transmission process). By indicating that the logged-in flag is ON, the player logs in to the gaming machine 100 using the input device 145 and indicates that the game history information can be stored in the game history information storage area of the sub-RAM 453. Can do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in S8102, in S8130, the sub CPU 451 sets an error display instruction command and returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4010: command transmission process). This error display instruction command is a display instruction command for causing the main display device 108 to display a password authentication error.

  Returning to FIG. 76, in the case of Yes in S7610, in S7630, the sub CPU 451 sets a game menu display instruction command. This game menu display instruction command is a display instruction command for causing the main display device 108 to display a game menu screen as a patch log screen.

  The game menu screen is a screen for prompting the player to select one of a plurality of processes (such as a display process of accumulated game history information and a logout process) that can be executed only after logging in. Then, the player can select / determine any of the menus using the input device 145 on the displayed game menu screen, and make an execution request for the determined menu. Then, the sub CPU 451 shifts the processing to S7640.

  In S7640, the sub CPU 451 selects / determines a display menu of game history information accumulated by the player from the game menu screen, and determines whether or not a display request for game history has been made. If there is a game history display request in S7640 (S7640: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S7642, and hits, jackpots, reach stored in the game history information storage area provided in the sub RAM 453. , Information related to the appearance, start winning, production, etc., that is, individual game history information is read out.

  In subsequent S7644, the sub CPU 451 sets a game history information display instruction command, and returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4010: command transmission process). This game history information display instruction command is a display instruction command for causing the main display device 108 to display the contents of the individual game history information stored in the game history information storage area.

  On the other hand, if there is no game history display request in S7640 (S7640: No), the sub-CPU 451 moves the process to S7650, has the player selected / determined the logout menu from the game menu screen, and has made a logout request? Determine whether or not. In S7650, if there is a logout request (S7650: Yes), the sub CPU 451 moves the process to S7606, performs a logout process, and returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4010: command transmission process). On the other hand, if there is no logout request in S7650 (S7650: No), the sub CPU 451 returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4010: command transmission process).

  Here, the contents of the logout process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of logout processing performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450. First, in S8200, the sub CPU 451 reads out player information stored in the player information storage area provided in the sub RAM 453, and moves the process to S8202.

  In S8202, the sub CPU 451 reads the personal game history information stored in the game history information storage area provided in the sub RAM 453 in the same manner as in S7642 described above, moves the process to S8210, and reads the game read in S8202. Create history information.

  In subsequent S8230, the sub CPU 451 creates the above-described code information (see FIGS. 78 and 80). That is, this code information is created using at least the player information read in S8200, the game history information created in S8210, and the address for accessing the information management device 7850.

  In subsequent S8240, the sub CPU 451 sets a code information display instruction command, moves the process to S8250, turns off the login flag, and returns the process to the timer interrupt process (S4010: command transmission process). This code information display instruction command is a display instruction command for causing the main display device 108 to display the code information created in S8230.

  Thereby, as described above, the player captures and reads the code information (for example, the matrix type two-dimensional code 7820, see FIG. 78) displayed on the main display device 108 with the camera of the information terminal 7800, and the like. By transferring this code information to the information management apparatus 7850, the information management apparatus 7850 can be accessed. That is, it is possible to output personal game history information such as information related to winning, jackpot, reach, payout, start winnings, and effects to the outside by the displayed code information.

This is the end of the description of the timer interrupt process performed by the sub CPU 451 of the effect control unit 450.
The gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in the embodiment and is within the scope of the present invention. Any changes or additions are included in the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine 100 has been described as a gaming machine having a probability variation confirmation region (V region) for confirming so-called one type of probability variation. A two-mixed type gaming machine may be used. Similar to the gaming machine 100, the type 1 and type 2 gaming machine has a probability variation determination area (V area) for determining the big hit of type 2 and has a configuration substantially similar to the configuration of the gaming machine 100. It is a gaming machine. Of course, it goes without saying that the present invention can be appropriately applied to other types of gaming machines.

  In the embodiment described above, the display of the demonstration screen on the main display device 108 is started by the first starter 116 and the second starter 118 as shown in FIG. 9 (S911) and FIG. 46 (S4604). A predetermined amount of time has passed since the display of the effect related to the jackpot lottery on the main display device 108 (the first and second special symbol displays 104a and 14b related to the jackpot lottery) is not executed. In addition to this, after the start memory of the normal symbol operation gate 112 is lost, the normal symbol change display related to the lottery is no longer executed by hitting the normal symbol display 104e. You may make it display when predetermined time passes. That is, the display of the demonstration screen may be made on condition that the change of both the effect symbol (special symbol) and the normal symbol is stopped.

  In the present invention, the gaming machine is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but includes a revolving type gaming machine (so-called slot machine), a sparrow ball gaming machine, an arrangement ball gaming machine, and the like that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention. It can also be applied to other game machines.

<Effect>
As is apparent from the above description, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to change the notification mode of the abnormal winning error according to the number of occurrences of the abnormal winning error when performing the abnormal winning error notification. Yes. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention A.

◇ Invention A
(1) A game area (game area 114) in which game balls flow down, and a variable that is provided in the game area and that can be converted from a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won to an open state in which a prize can be won when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. Winning devices (second starting device 118, first big winning device 120, second big winning device 146) and winning ball detecting means (second starting device switch 411) for detecting that a game ball has won the variable winning device. A gaming machine (game machine 100) having a first grand prize device switch 414 and a second grand prize device switch 416) when the variable prize device when the gaming condition is not satisfied is in a closed state. A winning determination means (abnormal winning error processing in step S1700) for determining whether or not a closed state winning for a game ball has occurred, and the winning determination means determines that the closed state winning has occurred within a predetermined period. Based on the number-of-times storing means (sub-RAM 453) for storing the number of times and the number of occurrences of the closed state winning stored by the number-of-times storing means, the fact that the game ball has won when the variable winning device is in the closed state is notified Notification means (main display device 108, audio output device 138, frame decoration lamp 141, game information output terminal board 424), and the notification means notifies the number of occurrences of the closed state prize stored in the number storage means. The game machine is executed in different notification modes depending on the game machine.

  (2) The notification means includes a plurality of types including an external output means (game information output terminal plate 424) for outputting to the outside, and the number of occurrences of the closed state prize stored in the number storage means is within a predetermined range. In some cases, the game machine according to (1), wherein only the external output by the external output unit is executed as the notification of the notification unit.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the invention A, it becomes easy to appropriately cope with the abnormal winning of the variable winning device.
In addition, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the voice notification related to the dish full tank error is not performed during the no-ball-out period in which the winning ball is not paid out during the big hit. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention B.

◆ Invention B
(3) A game area (game area 114) in which game balls flow down, and a winning device (first starter 116, second starter 118, first grand prize device) provided in the game area and capable of winning game balls. 120, a normal winning device 122, a second big winning device 146), a winning ball paying means (paying control unit 440) for paying out a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball wins the winning device, and the winning ball paying means A storage tray (lower tray 129) that stores the prize balls paid out from the storage tray as game balls, and a full-tank detection means (dish-full tank switch 423) that detects that the game balls stored in the storage tray have reached a predetermined amount. ) And a full tank notification means for notifying that the storage tray is filled with game balls when the full tank detection means detects that the game balls stored in the storage tray have reached a predetermined amount. Game with audio output device 138) In the (game machine 100), the winning device, which is a variable winning device that can be converted from a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won into an open state in which a winning can be won (first big winning device 120, second big winning device 146). When a predetermined game condition is satisfied, special game generating means (a special winning device process in S710) that generates a special game advantageous to the player, and when the special game occurs, the variable winning device is closed. Conversion control means (first big prize device opening / closing unit 415, second big prize device opening / closing unit 417) for controlling conversion from a state to the open state in a predetermined manner, and conversion of the variable prize device by the conversion control means The mode includes a first state in which the game ball is difficult to win and a second state in which the game ball is easy to win, and the full tank notifying unit is configured so that, when the conversion mode of the variable winning device is in the first state, Full tank detection Even if it is detected that the game balls stored in the storage tray have reached a predetermined amount due to the stage, the fact that the storage tray is full of game balls is not notified. Gaming machine.

  (4) A game area (game area 114) in which game balls flow down, and a winning device (first starter 116, second starter 118, first grand prize device) provided in the game area and capable of winning game balls. 120, a normal winning device 122, a second big winning device 146), a winning ball paying means (paying control unit 440) for paying out a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball wins the winning device, and the winning ball paying means A storage tray (lower tray 129) that stores the prize balls paid out from the storage tray as game balls, and a full-tank detection means (dish-full tank switch 423) that detects that the game balls stored in the storage tray have reached a predetermined amount. ) And a full tank notification means for notifying that the storage tray is filled with game balls when the full tank detection means detects that the game balls stored in the storage tray have reached a predetermined amount. Game with audio output device 138) In the (game machine 100), the winning device, which is a variable winning device that can be converted from a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won into an open state in which a winning can be won (first big winning device 120, second big winning device 146). When a predetermined game condition is satisfied, special game generating means (a special winning device process in S710) that generates a special game advantageous to the player, and when the special game occurs, the variable winning device is closed. Conversion control means (first big prize device opening / closing unit 415, second big prize device opening / closing unit 417) for controlling conversion from a state to the open state in a predetermined manner, and the special game is controlled by the conversion control means. The variable winning device includes an opening state at the start and an ending state at the end in which the variable winning device is maintained in the closed state, and the full tank notifying means is configured so that the special game is the opening state and the opening state. When the game is in a ding state, even if it is detected by the full tank detection means that the game balls stored in the storage tray have reached a predetermined amount, the storage tray is filled with game balls. A gaming machine characterized by not reporting that it has become tangled.

  (5) A game area (game area 114) in which game balls flow down and a winning device (first starter 116, second starter 118, first grand prize device) provided in the game area and capable of winning game balls. 120, a normal winning device 122, a second big winning device 146), a winning ball paying means (paying control unit 440) for paying out a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball wins the winning device, and the winning ball paying means A storage tray (lower tray 129) that stores the prize balls paid out from the storage tray as game balls, and a full-tank detection means (dish-full tank switch 423) that detects that the game balls stored in the storage tray have reached a predetermined amount. ) And a full tank notification means for notifying that the storage tray is filled with game balls when the full tank detection means detects that the game balls stored in the storage tray have reached a predetermined amount. Game with audio output device 138) In the (game machine 100), the winning device, which is a variable winning device that can be converted from a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won into an open state in which a winning can be won (first big winning device 120, second big winning device 146). When a predetermined game condition is satisfied, special game generating means (a special winning device process in S710) that generates a special game advantageous to the player, and when the special game occurs, the variable winning device is closed. Conversion control means (first big prize device opening / closing part 415, second big prize device opening / closing part 417) for controlling conversion from a state to the open state in a predetermined manner, and the special game is controlled by the conversion control means. Including a round game consisting of a plurality of rounds of a round in which the variable winning device performs an easy winning operation and a round in which the variable winning device performs an difficult winning operation, Even during the round game, during a period when the variable winning device performs a round in which it is difficult to win a prize, the game balls stored in the storage tray by the full tank detection means have reached a predetermined amount. Even if it is a case where it is detected, the game machine characterized by not notifying that the said storage tray became full with the game ball during the said period.

  (6) The full tank notification means is a voice output device (sound output device 138), and the voice output device notifies that the storage tray is full of game balls. The gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (5), characterized in that it is voice notification.

Therefore, according to such a gaming machine described in the invention B, it is possible to notify that the storage tray is filled with game balls according to the opening state of the variable winning device.
Further, in the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the door opening error notification is continued at a predetermined period even after the door opening detection means stops detecting the opening of the door by at least a lamp notification. It is comprised so that it may alert | report. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention C.

◆ Invention C
(7) Door bodies (glass frame 150, inner frame 170) provided on the front side of the gaming machine (gaming machine 100) so as to be openable and closable, and door opening detection means for detecting whether or not the door body is opened ( When the door opening is detected by the glass frame opening switch 483a and the inner frame opening switch 483b) and the door opening detecting means, a door opening notifying means for notifying that the door is opened ( In a gaming machine provided with an audio output device 138 and a frame decoration lamp 141), the door opening notification means continues during a period in which the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body. Notifying that the door has been opened and notifying that the door has been opened for a predetermined period of time even after the door opening detection means has stopped detecting the opening of the door. Characteristic gaming machine

  (8) When the door opening detection means detects that the door body is opened, it further comprises second door opening notification means (sound output device 138) for notifying that the door body is opened, When the period during which the door opening detecting unit continuously detects the opening of the door body does not reach a predetermined reference period, the second door opening notifying unit is configured so that at least the door opening detecting unit During the period in which the opening of the body is continuously detected, the fact that the door body is opened is informed, and the period during which the door opening detecting means continuously detects the opening of the door body is predetermined. When the reference period is reached, the notification that the door is opened is stopped regardless of the detection result of the door opening by the door opening detection means after the reference period. The gaming machine according to (7).

  (9) The door opening notification means is a light emitting device (frame decoration lamp 141), and the notification that the door body is opened by the door opening notification means is a light emission notification by the light emitting device. The two-door opening notification means is a voice output device (voice output device 138), and the notification that the door body is opened by the second door opening notification means is a voice notification by the voice output device. (8) The gaming machine according to (8).

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the invention C, it is possible to appropriately detect fraud performed by opening the door.
In addition, in the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the sound notification in the door opening error notification is performed when the door opening detection means starts the door detection by the door opening detection means when the door opening detection means starts detecting the opening of the door. Regardless of whether or not the opening is detected, the notification that the door is open is stopped. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention D.

◆ Invention D
(10) Door bodies (glass frame 150, inner frame 170) provided on the front side of the gaming machine (gaming machine 100) so as to be openable and closable, and door opening detection means for detecting whether or not the door body is opened ( When the door body is detected to be opened by the glass frame opening switch 483a and the inner frame opening switch 483b) and the door opening detecting means, door opening notifying means for notifying that the door body is opened ( In the gaming machine provided with the audio output device 138), the door opening notification means continues to open the door body during the period when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body. And when the predetermined period has elapsed since the door opening detection means started detecting the opening of the door body, the door opening detection means regardless of the detection result of the opening of the door body. The body is open Gaming machine characterized by stopping a notification of.

  (11) Door bodies (glass frame 150, inner frame 170) provided on the front side of the gaming machine (gaming machine 100) so as to be openable and closable, and door opening detection means for detecting whether or not the door body is opened ( When the door opening is detected by the glass frame opening switch 483a and the inner frame opening switch 483b) and the door opening detecting means, a door opening notifying means for notifying that the door is opened ( In the gaming machine provided with the audio output device 138), the door opening notifying unit is configured such that the period during which the door opening detecting unit continuously detects the opening of the door does not reach a predetermined reference period. During the period in which the door opening detection means continuously detects the opening of the door body, and for a predetermined period after the door opening detection means no longer detects the opening of the door body. Report that is open When the period during which the door opening detection unit continuously detects the opening of the door body reaches a predetermined reference period, the door opening detection unit continuously detects the opening of the door body. During the reference period, the game is notified that the door body is opened, and immediately after reaching the reference period, the notification that the door body is opened is stopped. Machine.

  (12) The door opening notification means is a voice output device (voice output device 138), and the notification that the door body is opened by the door opening notification means is voice notification by the voice output device. The gaming machine according to (10) or (11), wherein

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the invention D, it is possible to suitably notify the opening of the door body.
In addition, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the driving timings of the board gimmick and the frame gimmick when the power is turned on and when the power is restored are at least different from the driving timing of the board gimmick and the frame gimmick. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention E.

◆ Invention E
(13) At least a game board (game board 102) and a frame member (inner frame 170) on which the game board is detachably provided are arranged at a position where the player can visually recognize and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Production drive members (board gimmick 109, handle 130, retractable 137) operated by electrical drive means (chance button motor 474, retractable motor 481, patrol motor 482, board gimmick driving section 491, vibrator motor 493, air delivery fan 494). In the gaming machine (the gaming machine 100) including the patrol lamp 139 and the chance button 142), the effect driving member is a board surface driving member (upper gimmick 109a, lower gimmick that performs a predetermined effect operation on the front side of the gaming board). 109b, left gimmick 109c, right gimmick 109d) and front A frame driving member (handle 130, retractable 137, patrol lamp 139, chance button 142) that performs a predetermined rendering operation on the outer surface side of the frame member, and the electric driving means is after the game machine is turned on or after the power is restored The gaming machine characterized by causing the board surface driving member and the frame driving member to be initially operated, and causing the initial operation to be driven at different timings by the board surface driving member and the frame driving member.

  (14) A plurality of the panel surface driving members are provided and arranged at different positions, and each of the plurality of panel surface driving members is driven during an initial operation for a predetermined first period, and the frame driving member Are provided at a plurality of different positions, and each of the plurality of frame driving members is driven during a predetermined second period in which the initial operation is at least partially different from the first period. The gaming machine according to (13), characterized in that:

  (15) The initial operation of the panel surface driving member or the frame driving member (patrol lamp 139) is driven after moving from an invisible standby position to a predetermined visible position (13) or (14) The gaming machine described in 1.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the invention E, it is possible to suitably perform the initial operation at the time of turning on the power or restoring the power of the effect driving member operated by the electric driving means.

  In addition, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment counts the elapsed time since winning a predetermined winning device up to a reference time as a criterion that allows a hole to be set at a predetermined time in advance. The winning frequency abnormality error is determined based on whether or not the time has reached the reference time. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention F.

◆ Invention F
(16) A game area (game area 114) in which a game ball flows down, and an entry area that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the game area, A game machine (game machine 100) provided with a ball entry means (ordinary winning device 122) that is advantageous to the player, a reference time set in advance at a predetermined time, and a game ball entering the ball entry means Entry detection means (ordinary winning device switch 422) for detecting that the ball has been placed, and the elapsed time since the game ball entered the entry means by the entry detection means is counted up to the reference time. When a predetermined number of game balls have entered the time counting means (the winning information RAM remaining time countdown process in S4007) and the time counting means, the elapsed time reached the reference time. Determine whether or not Based on the determination means (S 6704 in the winning frequency abnormality error process) and the determination result of the determining means, it is determined whether or not the entering frequency to the entering means is abnormal. A gaming machine comprising S6712) in frequency abnormality error processing.

  (17) The time counting means is means for storing elapsed time data relating to the elapsed time since the game ball detected by the entrance detection means enters the entrance means, Elapsed time storage means (winning information RAM as a ring buffer) for storing the elapsed time data for each of the predetermined number of entrances to the means, and the determination means includes the entrance means When a predetermined number of game balls have entered, an abnormality determining means for determining whether or not the reference time has been reached for each of the elapsed times based on the elapsed time data stored in the elapsed time storage means ( S6704 in the winning frequency abnormality error process), and the winning frequency abnormality determining means determines whether or not the winning frequency is abnormal based on the determination result of the abnormality determining means. The gaming machine according to (16).

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the invention F, it is possible to suitably detect the abnormal entry frequency with respect to the entry means.
In addition, in the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the setting of a determination criterion (reference time for determining a winning frequency abnormality error) for performing abnormality determination is selected and set from a plurality of types. It is configured. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention G.

◆ Invention G
(18) Detection means (ordinary winning device switch 422) for detecting that the gaming machine (the gaming machine 100) is in a predetermined state, and abnormality determination processing for determining a predetermined abnormality based on the detection result of the detection means Is a gaming machine (gaming machine 100) equipped with an abnormality determining means (a winning frequency abnormality error process in S5122), and an abnormality determination standard setting for performing a setting related to a determination criterion (reference time) of the abnormality determination process Means (main display device 108, production key 144), and the setting of the determination criterion by the abnormality determination criterion setting unit can be set by selecting any one of a plurality of predetermined determination criteria. And the abnormality determination means executes the abnormality determination process based on the determination criterion selected and set by the abnormality determination criterion setting means.

  (19) A game area (game area 114) in which a game ball flows down, and an entry area that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the game area, Entry means that is advantageous to the player (normal symbol operation gate 112, first starting device 116, second starting device 118, first big winning device 120, ordinary winning device 122, second big winning device 146, probability variation confirmation area 204 ), The detection means detects that a game ball has entered the ball entry means (ordinary winning device switch 422), and the abnormality determination criterion setting means includes the abnormality determination process. Reference time setting means (main display device 108, effect key 144) for setting a reference time that is set in advance as a predetermined time as a determination reference is provided, and the abnormality determination means is configured such that the entrance detection means is the entrance means. Play When it is detected that a ball has been won, as the abnormality determination process, a pitch frequency abnormality determination process (a prize frequency abnormality error process in S5122) related to the frequency of the game ball entering the pitching means is executed, Based on detection of a game ball entering the ball entry means by the ball entry detection means for executing the ball entry frequency abnormality determination process, a game ball has entered the ball entry means. Time counting means for counting the elapsed time up to the reference time (the winning information RAM remaining time countdown process in S4007), and when a predetermined number of game balls have entered the pitching means, the time counting means counts time. Based on the determination means for determining whether or not the elapsed time has reached the reference time (S6704 in the winning frequency abnormality error process) and the determination result of the determination means, the pitching frequency is abnormal. Luke gaming machine according to ball entrance frequency abnormality determining means for determining whether, characterized in that it comprises a (S6712 in winning frequency anomaly error processing) (18).

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the invention G, it is possible to appropriately determine an abnormality related to the gaming machine such as an abnormality in the frequency of entering the entering means.
In addition, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment sets predetermined items related to the gaming machine such as a determination standard (reference time) for performing abnormality determination, an RTC time setting, and an eco mode setting when the power is turned on. Alternatively, it is configured to operate by operating a cursor button or a chance button when the power is restored. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention H.

◆ Invention H
(20) Setting means (main display device 108, effect key 144, effect button) for setting predetermined items (determination criteria, time setting, eco mode setting) related to the gaming machine (gaming machine 100) 142), wherein the setting of the predetermined item related to the gaming machine by the setting means is a predetermined operating means that can be operated by the player in accordance with a gaming state provided in the gaming machine A gaming machine characterized by being operated by operating the (effect key 144 and the effect button 142) and being executable when the gaming machine is turned on and / or restored.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the invention H, it is possible to suitably set the predetermined items related to the gaming machine.
In addition, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the abnormality-related information is stored and retained (backed up) in the storage unit of the sub-side production control unit 450 by the backup unit when the power is shut off. Yes. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as Invention I.

◆ Invention I
(21) Main control means (main control section 400) and sub-control means (production control section 450) for controlling the game, and detection means (ordinary) for detecting that the gaming machine (gaming machine 100) is in a predetermined state. In the gaming machine provided with a winning device switch 422), the sub-control unit performs an abnormality processing unit (a winning frequency abnormality error process in S5122) based on detection by the detection unit, and the abnormality Storage means (sub-RAM 453, winning information RAM) for storing abnormality-related information related to processing, and the abnormality-related information stored by the storage means is stored in the storage means when the power is shut off. A gaming machine characterized by being retained (backup RAM, FeRAM).

  (22) A game area (game area 114) in which a game ball flows down, and an entry area that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the game area, The winning means (ordinary winning device 122) which is advantageous to the player, the detecting means is a winning detecting means (normal winning device switch 422) for detecting that a game ball has entered the winning means, The main control means includes an input means (input port of the main control unit 400) for inputting a ball detection signal from the ball detection means, and the sub control means when the ball detection signal is input by the input means. Transmitting means (output port of the main control unit 400) for transmitting a winning detection command (ordinary winning device winning command) for notifying that to the sub-control means, the sub-control means from the transmitting means to the winning Enter detection command In this case, as the abnormality process, a ball entry frequency abnormality process (a winning frequency abnormality error process in S5122) related to the frequency of entering the game ball into the ball entry means is executed, and a reference time is set to a predetermined time in advance. Base time setting means (main display device 108, production key 144) to perform, and based on the detection of the entrance of the game ball to the entrance means by the entrance detection means for executing the entrance frequency abnormality processing Time counting means for counting the elapsed time since the game ball has entered the ball entry means up to the reference time (winning information RAM remaining time countdown process in S4007), and game balls to the ball entry means. Determining means for determining whether the elapsed time counted by the time counting means has reached the reference time (S67 in the winning frequency abnormality error process) 4) and a pitching frequency abnormality determining unit (S6712 in the winning frequency abnormality error process) for determining whether or not the pitching frequency is abnormal based on the determination result of the determining unit, and the storage unit The gaming machine according to (21), wherein the abnormality-related information to be stored is the reference time set by the reference time setting means.

  (23) The time counting means is means for storing elapsed time data relating to an elapsed time since a game ball entered the entry means based on an input of the entry detection command. Elapsed time storage means (winning information RAM as a ring buffer) for storing the elapsed time data for each of the predetermined number of incoming balls to the ball means is provided, and the determining means includes the incoming ball When a predetermined number of game balls have entered the means, an abnormality determination means for determining whether the reference time has been reached for each of the elapsed times based on the elapsed time data stored in the elapsed time storage means (S 6704 in the winning frequency abnormality error process), the pitch frequency abnormality determining means determines whether the pitch frequency is abnormal based on the determination result of the abnormality determining means, and the storage The abnormality-related information stored stages are gaming machine according to, wherein said elapsed time storage means has said elapsed time data stored (22).

  (24) The abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality is detected when it is determined that all of the elapsed time data stored for each entry has not reached the reference time (S6704: Yes), When it is determined that any one of them has reached the reference time, it is determined to be normal (S6704: No), and the abnormality input counts and stores the number of abnormality determinations determined as abnormal by the abnormality determination means. When the ball counter (abnormal winning counter) and the abnormality determination means determine normal, the elapsed time data stored for each ball is counted and stored as the normal determination count reaching the reference time. A normal entrance counter (normal winning counter), and the entrance frequency abnormality determining means determines whether the entrance frequency is abnormal based on the abnormal entrance counter and the normal entrance counter. The abnormality-related information stored in the storage means is the abnormality determination count and / or the normal determination count stored in the abnormal entrance counter and / or the normal entrance counter (23). The gaming machine described.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in Invention I, it is possible to suitably store abnormality related information related to abnormality detection.
In addition, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a winning frequency abnormality error process as an abnormal process on the sub side based on a detection signal from the winning detection switch, and outputs an external information terminal as a notification on the main side. The abnormality is notified only by a predetermined device controlled by the sub-side. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention J.

◆ Invention J
(25) Main control means (main control section 400) and sub-control means (production control section 450) for controlling the game, and detection means for detecting that the gaming machine (game machine 100) is in a predetermined state (FIG. 4-1) and abnormality determination means (abnormal processing in S 715, winning frequency abnormality error processing in S 5122 and S 7006) for making a predetermined abnormality determination based on the detection result of the detection means. In the gaming machine (the gaming machine 100), the abnormality determining means includes a first abnormality determining means (abnormal process in S715) executed by the main control means and a second abnormality determining means (S5122) executed by the sub-control means. And the second abnormality determining means, the sub-control means is outputted from the detecting means (ordinary winning device switch 422). Gaming machine, characterized in that on the basis of a constant detection signal may be performed.

  (26) As means for notifying the predetermined abnormality, output means (game information output terminal plate 424) for outputting the abnormality to the outside of the gaming machine via a predetermined external information terminal, the first abnormality determination means If the abnormality is determined by the output means, the abnormality can be notified by the output means, and if the abnormality is determined by the second abnormality determination means, the abnormality cannot be notified by the output means. The game according to (25), characterized in that the abnormality can be notified through predetermined devices (main display device 108, audio output device 138, frame decoration lamp 141) controlled by the sub-control means. Machine.

Therefore, according to such a gaming machine described in the invention J, it is possible to suitably determine abnormality.
Further, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment is based on a value obtained by subtracting the normal number data based on the number of times determined to be normal from the abnormal number data based on the number of times determined to be abnormal by the abnormal prize counter or the normal prize counter. And determining an abnormality in the winning frequency. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention K.

◆ Invention K
(27) A game area (game area 114) in which a game ball flows down, and an entry area that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the game area, a game A game machine equipped with a winning means (ordinary winning device 122) that is advantageous to the player, and detecting a reference time set in advance at a predetermined time and that a gaming ball has entered the entering means And a time counting unit (S4007) that counts the elapsed time since the game ball entered the ball entry unit by the ball entry detection unit up to the reference time. And determining whether or not the elapsed time counted by the time counting means has reached the reference time when a predetermined number of game balls have entered the pitching means. Judgment means (frequent winnings) S6704 in the abnormal error process) and a pitch frequency abnormality determining unit (in the winning frequency abnormal error process) for determining whether or not the frequency of entering the ball entering unit is abnormal based on the determination result of the determining unit. S6712), and the determination unit determines that an abnormality occurs when the elapsed time does not reach the reference time, and determines that the elapsed time is normal when the elapsed time reaches the reference time. It further includes an abnormality determining means (S6710, S6720 in the winning frequency abnormality error process), and the pitching frequency abnormality determining means is predetermined abnormality number data (abnormal winning counter) based on the number of times the abnormality determining means has determined to be abnormal. And whether or not the pitching frequency is abnormal based on predetermined normal number data (normal winning counter) based on the number of times determined to be normal, That the gaming machine.

  (28) The time counting means is means for storing elapsed time data relating to the elapsed time since the game ball detected by the entrance detection means enters the entrance means. Elapsed time storage means (winning information RAM as a ring buffer) for storing the elapsed time data for each of the predetermined number of entries to the means, and the abnormality determination means When a predetermined number of game balls enter the means, it is determined whether or not the reference time has been reached for each of the elapsed times based on the elapsed time data stored in the elapsed time storage means. The gaming machine according to (27).

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the invention K, it is possible to suitably detect an abnormal entry frequency with respect to the entry means.
In addition, in the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the error notification time that cannot be output to the external information terminal executed by the sub side is executed for a longer time than the error notification time that can be output to the external information terminal. At the time when the error notification with the higher priority is finished, if the execution time of the error notification with the lower priority has not yet elapsed, the error notification with the lower priority is started. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention L.

◆ Invention L
(29) Detection means (various switches and sensors shown in FIG. 4A) for detecting that the gaming machine (the gaming machine 100) is in a predetermined state, and predetermined abnormality determination based on the detection result of the detection means An abnormality determining means for performing processing (abnormal processing in S715, winning frequency abnormality error processing in S5122 and S7006), and notification means (main display device) for notifying that when the abnormality determining means determines a predetermined abnormality 108, a sound output device 138, and a frame decoration lamp 141), the first abnormality that is output to the outside via a predetermined external information terminal (game information output terminal plate 424) in response to the predetermined abnormality. (Abnormal winning error, magnet detection error, discharge error) and second error that does not output to the outside via the external information terminal (dish full error, door open error, payout status error, Switch error error, radio wave detection error, discharge ball check error, solenoid photo sensor error error, impact detection error, error V winning error, winning frequency error error), and the notification means notifies the second error The second abnormality notification execution time is executed for a time longer than the first abnormality notification execution time when the first abnormality is notified.

  (30) The notification means for notifying the first abnormality or the second abnormality is an image display device (main display device 108) that displays an image, an audio output device (audio output device 138) that outputs sound, or light. One of the light emitting devices (frame decoration lamp 141) that emits light, and at least the second abnormality notification execution time by the image display device or the light emitting device is executed for a time longer than the first abnormality notification execution time. The gaming machine according to (29), characterized in that it is characterized.

  (31) Priority order notification means (FIG. 74) is provided for causing abnormality notification by the notification means to be executed according to a predetermined priority when the predetermined abnormality occurs in duplicate, and at least abnormality notification by the voice output device Is notified according to the priority of the priority notification means, and when the abnormality notification with a low priority has not yet elapsed at the time when the abnormality notification with a high priority is completed, the priority is low. (30) The gaming machine according to (30), wherein abnormality notification is started.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the invention L, it is possible to suitably perform abnormality notification for notifying that an abnormality has occurred.
In addition, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment allows the number of game balls to be awarded to a predetermined winning device within a period in which the number of start times of a special symbol or a normal symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, or to other winning means. An abnormality in the winning frequency is determined based on how many times a predetermined number of game balls have been entered. That is, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the following configuration as the invention M.

◆ Invention M
(32) A game area (game area 114) where a game ball flows down, and a game area that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball enters the game area when the game ball enters the game area. A winning means (ordinary winning device 122) that is advantageous to the player, and a lottery game for determining whether or not the game state is shifted to a special game that is beneficial to the player when the game ball enters the game area. A gaming machine (gaming machine 100) provided with starting means (first starting device 116, second starting device 118) to be executed, and detecting the entrance of a game ball that has entered the entrance means Means (ordinary winning device switch 422), starting ball detecting means (first starting device switch 410, second starting device switch 411) for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting means, and detecting the entered ball The incoming ball detected by means The number-of-balls counting means (S7002 in the abnormality-related command reception process) for counting the number of times the game balls have entered the stage, and the lottery within the period when the start ball detection means detects a predetermined number of game balls In a period in which the game has been executed a predetermined number of times, a pitching frequency determining means for determining whether or not the pitching count counted by the pitching count counting means has reached a predetermined reference count (a winning frequency abnormality) S7106) in the error processing (modified example) and the pitching frequency abnormality determining unit (winning frequency abnormality error processing) for determining whether or not the pitching frequency is abnormal based on the determination result of the pitching frequency determining unit (Modification) S7112) and a gaming machine.

  (33) A reference number setting unit (main display device 108, effect key 144) for setting the reference number to a predetermined number in advance is provided, and the setting of the reference number by the reference number setting unit is a plurality of pre-set The gaming machine according to (32), wherein any one of the different times is selected and set.

  (34) The gaming machine according to (33), wherein the setting of the reference number by the reference number setting means is executable when the gaming machine is turned on and / or restored.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the invention M, it is possible to suitably detect an abnormal entry frequency with respect to the entry means.
It should be understood that the terms used in this specification are used in the meaning normally used in the art unless otherwise specified. Thus, unless defined otherwise, all technical and technical terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. In case of conflict, the present specification, including definitions, will control.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 ... Game machine 102 ... Game board 106 ... Identification display (4th pattern display)
106a ... 1st identification display (4th symbol display)
106b ... 2nd identification display (4th symbol display)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 108 ... Main display device 109 ... Board surface gimmick 109a ... Upper gimmick 109b ... Lower gimmick 109c ... Left gimmick 109d ... Right gimmick 112 ... Normal symbol operation gate 114 ... Game area 116 ... First starter 118 ... Second starter 120 ... First 1 Grand Prize Winner 122 ... Normal Winner (Pick-up means)
129 ... Lower plate 130 ... Handle 137 ... Retractable 138 ... Speaker (sound output device)
139 ... Patrol lamp 141 ... Frame decoration lamp 142 ... Direction button (chance button)
143 ... Ambient lamp 144 ... Production key 145 ... Input device 146 ... Second grand prize winning device 150 ... Glass frame 170 ... Inner frame 200 ... Opening / closing member (right)
202 ... Probability confirmation region opening / closing member (V-shaped)
204 ... Probability change confirmation region (V region, condition device operation region)
206: Discharge area 400 ... Main control unit 401 ... Main CPU
405 ... RAM clear switch 410 ... first starter switch 411 ... second starter switch 414 ... first big prize device switch 416 ... second big prize device switch 417 ... second big prize device opening / closing part (electric solenoid, conversion control) means)
418 ... Second prize winning device discharge switch 419 ... Probability change confirmation region (V region) switch 420 ... Probability change confirmation region (V region) photo sensor 422 ... Normal winning device switch (ball entry detection means)
423 ... Dish full switch 424 ... Game information output terminal board (external information terminal)
426 ... Magnetic sensor 427 ... Radio wave sensor 428 ... Impact sensor 429 ... Frame count switch 440 ... Discharge control unit 445 ... No ball switch 446 ... Discharge ball count switch 447 ... Rotor rotation switch 450 ... Production control unit 451 ... Sub CPU
453 ... Sub RAM (winning information RAM, ring buffer, elapsed time storage means)
454 ... RTC (real-time clock)
460 ... Image sound control unit 465 ... Volume switching switch (eco-mode switch)
470 ... Lamp control unit 474 ... Chance button motor 481 ... Retractable motor 482 ... Patlamp motor 483 ... Door opening switch 483a ... Glass frame opening switch 483b ... Inner frame opening switch 491 ... Board surface gimmick drive unit 492 ... Production handle device 493 ... Vibrator Motor 494 ... Air delivery fan

Claims (1)

A game area where game balls flow down,
A variable winning device provided in the gaming area and capable of converting from a closed state in which a gaming ball cannot be won to an open state in which a prize can be won when a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising: a winning ball detecting means for detecting that a game ball has won the variable winning device;
A winning determination means for determining a closed state winning in which a game ball wins when the variable winning device when the gaming condition is not satisfied is in a closed state;
Number-of-times storage means for storing the number of times that the winning determination means has determined that the closed state winning has occurred within a predetermined period;
Informing means for notifying that the closed state winning has occurred based on the number of occurrences of the closed state winning stored in the number storage means,
The notification means includes
Including a voice notification means for notification by voice and a light emission notification means for notification by light emission,
The sound notification means and the light emission notification means are executed in relation to the number of occurrences of the closed state prize stored in the number storage means, and are not executed when the number of occurrences of the closed state prize is less than a predetermined number, A game machine characterized in that, when it is determined by the winning determination means during the notification that the closed state winning has occurred, notification is further executed for a predetermined time from that point.